From ed5640d8b587fbcfed7dd7967f3de04b37a76f26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Daniel Baumann Date: Sun, 7 Apr 2024 11:06:44 +0200 Subject: Adding upstream version 4:7.4.7. Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann --- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp | 122 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp | 63 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp | 75 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp | 109 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp | 316 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp | 393 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp | 81 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp | 25 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp | 95 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp | 548 ++++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp | 97 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp | 126 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp | 62 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp | 134 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp | 102 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp | 134 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp | 166 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp | 111 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp | 71 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp | 65 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp | 78 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp | 62 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp | 69 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp | 79 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp | 79 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 186 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp | 264 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp | 190 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp | 147 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp | 193 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp | 125 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp | 143 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 447 ++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp | 95 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp | 59 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp | 61 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp | 81 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp | 81 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp | 95 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp | 66 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp | 137 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp | 63 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp | 69 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp | 77 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp | 146 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp | 64 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp | 61 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp | 90 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp | 93 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 64 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp | 114 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp | 72 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp | 91 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp | 119 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp | 85 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp | 70 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp | 69 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp | 242 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp | 189 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp | 275 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp | 75 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp | 379 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp | 69 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp | 88 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp | 89 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp | 70 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp | 72 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp | 114 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp | 210 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp | 85 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp | 217 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp | 84 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp | 103 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp | 112 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp | 62 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 90 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp | 72 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp | 158 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp | 190 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp | 66 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp | 86 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp | 101 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp | 84 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp | 83 ++ .../text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp | 69 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp | 59 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp | 67 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp | 73 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp | 82 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp | 70 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp | 62 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp | 68 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp | 90 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp | 67 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp | 72 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp | 66 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp | 69 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp | 39 + .../text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp | 100 ++ .../source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp | 92 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp | 144 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp | 63 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp | 59 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp | 59 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp | 59 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp | 60 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp | 60 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp | 661 ++++++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp | 92 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp | 73 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp | 84 ++ .../source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp | 29 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp | 1108 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp | 113 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp | 90 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp | 70 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 112 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp | 67 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp | 114 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp | 93 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp | 81 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp | 83 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp | 85 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp | 228 ++++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp | 62 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp | 57 + .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp | 66 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp | 64 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp | 65 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp | 63 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp | 75 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 69 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp | 80 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp | 89 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp | 115 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp | 71 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp | 61 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 106 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 103 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp | 60 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp | 232 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp | 135 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp | 66 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp | 64 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 130 +++ .../text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp | 79 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp | 73 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp | 70 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp | 170 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp | 70 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp | 95 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp | 98 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp | 69 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp | 126 +++ .../text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp | 67 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp | 66 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp | 73 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp | 69 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp | 93 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp | 94 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp | 74 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp | 126 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp | 60 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp | 88 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp | 96 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp | 47 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp | 46 + .../swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp | 61 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp | 59 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp | 51 + .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp | 59 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp | 60 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp | 76 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp | 40 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp | 85 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp | 76 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp | 233 ++++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp | 55 + .../text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp | 81 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp | 127 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp | 89 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp | 78 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp | 139 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp | 124 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp | 145 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp | 144 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp | 70 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp | 92 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp | 62 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp | 67 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp | 168 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp | 133 +++ .../text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp | 71 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp | 64 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp | 62 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 82 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp | 105 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp | 97 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp | 66 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp | 82 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 58 + .../text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp | 67 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp | 69 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp | 102 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp | 61 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp | 63 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 60 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp | 188 ++++ .../guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp | 61 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp | 98 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp | 68 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp | 66 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 93 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp | 121 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp | 158 +++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 64 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp | 77 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp | 100 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp | 79 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp | 78 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp | 97 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp | 62 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp | 68 ++ .../text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp | 75 ++ .../source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp | 63 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp | 100 ++ .../source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp | 420 ++++++++ .../source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp | 68 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp | 60 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp | 75 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp | 87 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp | 70 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp | 78 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp | 82 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp | 162 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp | 60 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp | 91 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp | 114 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp | 36 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp | 70 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp | 70 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp | 69 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp | 79 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp | 84 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp | 81 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp | 77 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp | 56 + .../text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp | 46 + .../text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp | 41 + .../text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp | 267 +++++ 406 files changed, 34048 insertions(+) create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text/swriter') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c3140db62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + +To access this function... +/text/swriter/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + To access this function... +
+ + + + + + + Wrap Off Icon + + + Wrap Off + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Wrap On Icon + + + Wrap On + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Wrap Through Icon + + + Wrap Through + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Jump to Previous Script Icon + + + Jump to Previous Script + + + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + Jump to Next Script Icon + + + Jump to Next Script + + + +
+
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..973db9710 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +File Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp + + + +File Menu +Menu File - Export + +Choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation + +Choose File - Send - Outline to Clipboard + +Choose File - Send - Create AutoAbstract + +Choose File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation + +Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document + +
+Insert at least one address database field into a text document, then start printing the document. Answer "Yes" to the question whether you want to print a form letter.i80170 +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Mail Merge + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364b0e600 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Edit Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000402.xhp + + + +Edit Menu +
+Choose Tools - AutoText +Command +Ctrl+F3 +On the Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +AutoText + + +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Exchange Database + +Choose Edit - Fields + +Choose Edit - Footnotes + +
+Choose Edit - Reference - Index Entry... + +Open context menu - choose Index Entry + +
+Choose Format - Sections + +Choose Tools - AutoText - AutoText - Rename + +Choose Edit - Bibliography Entry + +Choose Edit - Selection Mode + +Choose Edit - Direct Cursor Mode + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a02972dee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + View Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp + + + + +

View Menu

+Choose View - Rulers - Rulers +Choose View - Text Boundaries + +
+Choose View - Field Shadings +Command +Ctrl+F8 +
+ +
+Choose View - Field Names +Command +Ctrl+F9 +
+ +
+Choose View - Formatting Marks +Command +Ctrl+F10 +On Standard bar, click + +
+ + + + + Formatting Marks Icon + + + Formatting Marks + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose View - Show Whitespace. + + + + + Icon Show Whitespace + + + + Show Whitespace + + +
+
+ + + +
+Choose View - Web +On Tools bar, enable + +
+ + + + + Web Icon + + + Web + + +
+ +
+
+ +
+Choose View - Normalremoved table with icon (was copy/paste error) +
+Choose View - Hidden Paragraphs + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b79e105d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,316 @@ + + + + + + +Insert Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000404.xhp + + + +

Insert Menu

+Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break + +
+Choose Insert - More Breaks +
+
+Choose Insert - Field +Fields do not have context menus (15.01.20) +Open context menu - choose Fields (inserted fields) +
+Choose Insert - Field - Date +Choose Insert - Field - Time +Choose Insert - Field - Page Number +Choose Insert - Field - Page Count +Choose Insert - Field - Subject +Choose Insert - Field - Title +Choose Insert - Field - First Author +
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields +Command +Ctrl+F2 +On Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Fields + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Document tab +
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Cross-references tab +Choose Insert - Cross-reference +
+Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Functions tab +Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - DocInformation tab +Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Variables tab +Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Database tab +
+Choose Insert - Section + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Section + + + +Section + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Section - Section tab or choose Format - Sections + +Choose Insert > Section > Indents tab or choose Format > Sections - Options button - Indents tab + +
+Choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Footnote or Endnote + +Open context menu - choose Footnote/Endnote (inserted Footnote/Endnote) +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Footnote Directly + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Endnote Directly + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Caption + +Open context menu - choose Caption + +
+
+Choose Insert - Caption - Options + +Open context menu - choose Caption - Options + +
+
+Choose Insert - Bookmark + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Bookmark + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Script (only HTML documents) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index + +
+Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Entry + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (depending on the type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Table of Contents is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Alphabetical Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Illustration Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Index of Tables is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when User-Defined is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Table of Objects is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type tab (when Bibliography is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type, mark "Additional Styles" check box and then click Assign styles + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (depending on type selected) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Table of Contents is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Alphabetical Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Illustration Index is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Index of Tables is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when User-Defined is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Table of Objects is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Entries tab (when Bibliography is the selected type) + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry and click Edit + +Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Styles tab + +Choose Insert - Envelope + +Choose Insert - Envelope - Envelope tab + +Choose Insert - Envelope - Format tab + +Choose Insert - Envelope - Printer tab + +
+Choose Insert - Frame + +Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Insert Frame + + +Insert Frame Manually + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Table - Insert Table + +Command +Ctrl+F12 +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Table + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Horizontal Rule + +
+Choose Insert - Text from File + +Open Insert toolbar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Text from File + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header + +Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c940e4a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,393 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp + + + +

Format Menu

+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Drop Caps tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Drop Caps tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Text Flow tab. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format - Text Flow tab. +
+
+ Right-click a paragraph with style Text body. Choose Paragraph - Edit Style - Condition tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11). Right-click any paragraph style. Choose New - Condition tab. +
+
+ Choose Styles - Load Styles from Template + In the Styles window, do a long click on the Styles action icon on the top right. Choose Load Styles from Template from the submenu. + Different ways to open Styles window: + + Press Command+TF11 + Choose View - Styles + Choose Styles - Manage Styles + +
+
+ Choose Format - Page Style. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - choose Page Styles - open context menu for selected style - New/Modify. +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & List tab. + Right-click a paragraph, choose Paragraph - Paragraph - Outline & List tab. + Right-click a paragraph, choose Paragraph - Edit Style - Outline & List tab. + Choose Styles - Edit Style - Outline & List tab (Paragraph Styles). + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - List & Numbering tab (Paragraph Styles). +
+ Choose Format - Sections - Options button. +
+ Choose Format - Page Style - Columns tab. + Choose View - Styles - Page Styles - open context menu for selected page style - Modify/New - Columns tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Columns tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Columns tab. + Choose Insert - Section - Columns tab. + Choose Format - Section - Options button - Columns tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Page Style - Footnote tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Footnote tab. +
+
+ Choose Insert - Section - Footnotes/Endnotes tab. + Choose Format - Sections - Options button Footnotes/Endnotes tab. +
+ Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles). +
+ + + Choose View - Styles or Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11) to open Styles deck. + + + Click on the Character Style icon at top of the deck, then select a character style. + + + Right-click to open context menu and choose Modify/New. + + + + + + +Character Style Icon + + + + Character Style icon + + +
+
+ Choose View - Styles - open context menu Modify/New (for Frame Styles). +
+ Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - open context menu Modify/New (for List Styles). +
+ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes. + Choose Table - AutoFormat Styles (with cursor in a table). +
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Area tab. + On the Image bar (when images are selected), click +
+ + + + Icon Graphics Properties + + + Graphics Properties + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Position and Size tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Position and Size tab.UFI: removed some lines with Format-Object, see #i64150 +Choose View - Styles - Frame Styles - open context menu Modify/New - Type tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Position and Size tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Wrap tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Wrap tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Wrap tab. + Choose Format - Wrap - Edit - Wrap tab. +
+ Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. +
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Hyperlink tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Hyperlink tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Hyperlink tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Options tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu for selected Frame style - Modify/New - Options tab. + Choose Insert - Frame - Frame - Options tab. + Right-click selected object, choose Properties - Options tab. +
+ Choose Format - Image - Properties - Image tab. +
+ Choose Insert/Format - Image - Properties - Macro tab. + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Macro tab. + Choose Tools - AutoText - AutoText (button) - Macro. + Choose Tools - ImageMap - open context menu Macro. + Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button. +
+
+ Choose Table - Properties. + On the Table bar (with cursor in table), click +
+ + + + +Table Properties Icon + + + + Table Properties + + +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Split Table. + Choose Table - Merge Table. + Choose Table - Properties - Table tab. + Choose Table - Properties - Columns tab. + Choose Table - Properties - Text Flow tab. + Right-click in a table, choose Cell. +
+ Choose Table - Merge Cells. + On the Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Merge Cells + + + Merge Cells + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Split Cells. + On the Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Unmerge Cells + + + Unmerge CellsSplit Cells + + +
+ +
+
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect. +
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Unprotect. + Open context menu in Navigator for tables. +
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Row. + In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - Height. +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Optimal Row Height + + + Optimal Row Height + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Evenly. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Distribute Rows Evenly + + + Distribute Rows Evenly + + +
+ +
+
+ Choose Table - Select - Row. +
+ Choose Table - Delete - Rows. + On Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Delete Row + + + Delete Row + + +
+ +
+
+ In the context menu of a cell, choose Column. + In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - Width. +
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Optimal Column Width + + + Optimal Column Width + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally. + Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Distribute Columns Evenly + + + Space Columns Equally + + +
+ +
+
+ Choose Table - Select - Column. +
+ Choose Table - Insert - Columns. + Choose Table - Insert - Rows. + On Table bar, click + + + + Icon Insert Column + + + Insert Column + + + + + Icon Insert Row + + + Insert Row + + +
+ +
+
+ Choose Table - Delete - Columns. + On Table bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Delete Column + + + Delete Column + + +
+ +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. +
+ + + + Icon Object Properties + + + Object Properties + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + Icon Frame Properties + + + Frame Properties + + +
+ +
+
+ Menu Format - Page Style - tab Text Grid, if Asian language support is enabled +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e67b4042 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Menu + /text/swriter/00/00000406.xhp + + + + + +Tools Menu +Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation +Choose Tools - Word Count +Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering +Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering - Numbering tab +Choose Tools - Line Numbering (not for HTML format) +Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes +Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes - Footnotes tab +Choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes - Endnotes tab +Choose Table - Convert - Text to Table +Choose Tools - Sort + +
+Choose Tools - Calculate +CommandCtrl + plus sign +
+Choose Tools - Update +Choose Tools - Update - Page Formatting +Choose Tools - Update - Current Index +Choose Tools - Update - Indexes and Tables +Choose Tools - Update - Update All + +
+Choose Tools - Update - Fields +F9 key +
+Choose Tools - Update - Links +Choose Tools - Update - Charts + +
+ Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Fields. + Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Bookmarks. +
+ +
+Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard +Click the Mail Merge icon on the Mail Merge bar: +Click the Mail Merge icon on the Table Data bar: + + + + Icon + + + Mail Merge + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..189848a60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + + The styles menu + /text/swriter/00/stylesmenu.xhp + + + + Choose Styles - Edit Styles. + Choose Styles - Update Selected Style or CommandCtrl+ Shift+F11. + Choose Styles - New Style from Selection or Shift+F11. + Choose Styles - Load Styles from Template. + Choose Styles - Manage Styles or Command+TF11. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..827ce08eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Print Preview + /text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Print Preview

+Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview. +
+ +
+ +
+Use the icons on the Print Preview Bar to scroll through the pages of the document or to print the document. +You can also press Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll through the pages. +You cannot edit your document while you are in the print preview. + +To exit the print preview, click the Close Preview button. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6dd10953f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge +/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp + + + + + + +Mail Merge +The Mail Merge dialog helps you in printing and saving form letters. + +
+ +
+During printing, the database information replaces the corresponding database fields (placeholders). For more information about inserting database fields refer to the Database tab page under Insert - Field - More Fields.db browser explorer +Select a database and table.db browser records + +Records +Determines the number of records for printing the form letter. One letter will be printed for each record. +All +Processes all the records from the database. +Selected records +Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database. + +From: +Specify the number of the first record to be printed. +To: +Specify the number of the last record to be printed. +Output +Determines whether to send your form letters to a printer or save them to a file. +Printer +Prints the form letters. +File +Saves the form letters in files. + + +Save as single document +Create one big document containing all data records.save as individual documents + + +Save as individual documents +Create one document for every one data record. + +Generate file name from database + +Generate each file name from data contained in a database. + +Field + +Uses the content of the selected database field as the file name for the form letter. + + + +Path +Specifies the path to store the form letters. + + +... +Opens the Select Path dialog. + + +File format +Select the file format to store the resulting document. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..616b8a97a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Outline to Presentation +/text/swriter/01/01160100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Outline to Presentation +Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95f0ed5a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Outline to Clipboard +/text/swriter/01/01160200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +send;outline to clipboard +outline;outline to clipboard +clipboard;outline to clipboard + +Outline to Clipboard +Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF). +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f307f707c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create AutoAbstract +/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Create AutoAbstract + +Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents. You can specify the number of outline levels as well as the number of paragraphs displayed therein. All levels and paragraphs under the respective settings are hidden. + +
+ +
+ +Included Outline Levels +Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document. For example, if you choose 4 levels, all paragraphs formatted with Heading 1 to Heading 4 are included, along with the number of subsequent paragraphs specified in Subpoints per Level. + +Subpoints per Level +Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading. All of the paragraphs up to the maximum defined are included until the next paragraph with a Heading Style is reached. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..909d2124f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoAbstract to Presentation +/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +AutoAbstract to Presentation +Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style. +
+
+ +
+Included Outline Levels +Enter the number of outline levels to include in the new presentation. For example, if you choose one level, only the paragraphs that follow the "Heading 1" paragraph style are included. +Subpoints per Level +Enter the number of paragraphs that you want to include below each outline level (heading). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eaa0114cc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Name and Path of HTML Documents +/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp + + + + + + +

Name and Path of HTML Documents

+Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document. If you choose this option, a separate page of links to all of the pages that are generated is also created. + +
+ +
+Consecutive numbers are added to the file name if more than one HTML document is created. The titles of the HTML pages are created from the topmost chapter heading. +

File name

+ +

separated by

+Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page. To use this option, apply one of the heading paragraph styles to the paragraphs where you want to start a new page in the document. +

File type

+ +

Save

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce0153ae9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,548 @@ + + + + + + + Navigator + /text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +
+To open the Navigator, choose View - Navigator (F5). To move the Navigator, drag its title bar. To dock the Navigator, drag its title bar to the left, right or bottom edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, hold down the CommandCtrl key and double-click on a grey area of the Navigator. +Click the expander icon next to a category in the Navigator to view the items in the category. To view the number of items in a category, rest your mouse pointer over the category in the Navigator. To jump to an item in the document, double-click the item in the Navigator. +To jump to the next or previous item in a document, use the Navigate by box to select the item category, and then click the up or down arrows. + +The navigator shows what corresponds to the editing location in the navigator view. This can be according to different categories: Headings, Tables, Hyperlinks and so on. When the "Content Navigation View" button is pressed and headings are selected, the heading belonging to the current editing position is displayed and highlighted in the Navigator. When tables are selected, the associated table is displayed, and so on. If the element is located in a collapsed layer, the required layers above it are automatically expanded and remain expanded afterwards. + + + + + + +

Navigate By

+Use selection box to choose which type of item should be navigated, when using the Previous and Next buttons. + + +

Previous

+Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigate By list, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". + + + + + Icon Previous Object + + + Previous Item + + +
+ + + +

Next

+Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigate By list, and then click an item category - for example, "Images". + + + + + Icon Next Object + + + Next Item + + +
+ + +

Page number

+Type the number of the page that you want to jump to, and then press Enter. Use the spin buttons to navigate. + +

Content Navigation View

+Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category. +Context menus use a selection of commands found on this help page. The commands in a context menu change, depending on which category or item is selected. + + + + Icon Switch Content Navigation View + + + Switch Content Navigation View + + +
+ + + + + Icon + + + Category + + + Context Menu + + + + + Headings Icon + + + Headings + + + Collapse/Expand All, Send Outline to Clipboard, Outline Folding, Outline Tracking, Outline Level + + + + + + Heading item + + + Collapse/Expand All, Go to, Select, Delete, Promote Chapter, Demote Chapter, Promote Level, Demote Level, Outline Content Visibility, Outline Tracking, Outline Level + + + + + +Tables Icon + + + Tables + + + + + + + Table items + + + Go to, Select, Edit, Delete, Rename + + + + + Frames icon + + + Frames + + + + + + +Images Icon + + + Images + + + + + + +OLE Objects Icon + + + OLE Objects + + + + + + +Bookmarks Icon + + + Bookmarks + + + + + + + Frame, Image, OLE Objects, Bookmark items + + + Go to, Edit, Delete, Rename + + + + + +Sections Icon + + + Sections + + + + + + + Section items + + + Go to, Select, Edit, Rename + + + + + +Hyperlinks Icon + + + Hyperlinks + + + + + + + Hyperlink items + + + Go to, Edit, Delete, Rename + + + + + +References Icon + + + References + + + + + +Indexes Icon + + Indexes + + + + + + + References, Indexes items + + + Go to + + + + + +Comments Icon + + + Comments + + Show All, Hide All, Delete All + + + + + + + Comments items + + + Go to, Edit, Delete + + + + + +Drawing objects Icon + + + Drawing objects + + + + + + + Drawing objects items + + + Go to, Delete, Rename + + + + + + All + + + Drag Mode, Display + + +
+A hidden section in a document appears gray in the Navigator, and displays the text "hidden" when you rest the mouse pointer over it. The same applies to header and footer contents of Page Styles that are not used in a document, and hidden contents in tables, frames, graphics, OLE objects, and indexes. +

Toggle Master View

+Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open. + + + + + Icon Toggle Master View + + + Toggle Master View + + +
+ + + +

Header

+Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area. + + + + + Icon Header + + + Header + + +
+ + + +

Footer

+Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area. + + + + + Icon Footer + + + Footer + + +
+ + + +

Anchor <-> Text

+Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor. + + + + + Icon Anchor <-> Text + + + Anchor <-> Text + + +
+ + + +

Set Reminder

+Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button. + + + + + Icon Set Reminder + + + Set Reminder + + +
+Reminders are navigated in the order in which they are set. Reminders are not saved when a document is closed. + + + +

Outline Level

+ + + + Icon Outline level + + + Outline level + + +
+ +Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window. You can also access this command by right-clicking a heading in the Navigator window. + + +

1-10

+Click 1 to only view the top level headings (chapter heading) in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings. + + + +

List Box

+Shows or hides the Navigator list. + + + + + Icon List box on/off + + + List box on/off + + +
+ + + +

Promote Level

+Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Promote level + + + Promote level + + +
+ + + +

Demote Level

+Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Demote level + + + Demote level + + +
+ + + +

Promote Chapter

+Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Chapter Up + + + Chapter Up + + +
+ + + +

Demote Chapter

+Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click this icon. + + + + + Icon Chapter down + + + Chapter down + + +
+ +To quickly reorder headings and their associated text in your document, select the "Headings" category in the list, and then click the Content View icon. Now you can use drag-and-drop to reorder contents. + + + +

Drag Mode

+Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use. + + + + + Icon Drag mode + + + Drag mode + + +
+ + + +

Insert As Hyperlink

+Creates a hyperlink when you drag and drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to. + + +

Insert As Link

+Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag and drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. + + +

Insert As Copy

+Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes. + + + +

Open Documents

+Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the contents of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list. +You can also right-click an item in the Navigator, choose Display, and then click the document that you want to view. + +

Outline Tracking

+Set Navigator’s mode of outline tracking. This feature applies only to outline entries under Headings in the Content View frame of Navigator. To see, enable, or change the mode, right-click on Headings or an item under Headings and choose Outline Tracking. The selected mode is applied to the entire document. +In Default and Focus mode, Navigator will automatically select the nearest heading before the current cursor position in the document. + In Default mode, the display of outline entries in Navigator is never changed, only an outline entry is selected. +In Focus mode, Navigator shows only the headings for the selected outline level, relative to the next higher outline level. For example, if a level 2 heading is selected, then all level 2 headings under the same level 1 heading are shown, while any level 3-10 headings (under the same level 1 heading) are collapsed. Other headings, not under the same level 1 heading, are also collapsed. +Choose Off to disable Outline Tracking. +
+ +Using Navigator to Arrange Headings + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73df40a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Navigation +/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Navigation +If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document. You can then use the up and down arrow icons to position the text cursor in the document on the previous or next target. + +Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object. + +Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object. +By default, as long as you have not selected any other entry, the arrow buttons jump to the previous or the next page in the document. The arrow buttons are black if you are browsing through pages and blue if you jump to other objects. +The entries largely correspond to those in the Navigator selection box. You can also select other jump destinations. An example are the reminders, which you can set with the Set Reminder icon in the Navigator. You can select an object from among the following options on the Navigation toolbar: table, frame, graphics, OLE object, page, headings, reminder, drawing object, control field, section, bookmark, selection, footnote, note, index entry, table formula, wrong table formula. +Reminders are navigated in the order in which they are set. +For table formulas, you can either jump to all table formulas located within your document or only to the incorrect ones. For incorrect formulas, you jump only to formulas that have resulted in errors. The program skips over formulas with resulting errors (those that reference incorrect formulas). +Working With the Navigation Toolbar +Open the Navigation toolbar by clicking on its top left icon located on the top of the Navigator display area. You can break the toolbar away from its place by dragging and arranging it on the screen. + +Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click one of the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected. +You can configure $[officename] according to your specific preferences for navigating within a document. To do this, choose Tools - Customize. The various tables for adapting menus, keyboard input or toolbars contain various functions for navigation within the document under the "Navigate" area. In this way you can jump to the index tags in the document with the "To Next/Previous Index Tag" functions. +searching; repeating a search + +Repeat Search +With the Repeat search icon on the Navigation toolbar you can repeat a search you started with the Search and Replace dialog. To do this, click the icon. The blue arrow buttons on the vertical scrollbar now take on the functions Continue search forwards and Continue search backwards. If you now click one of the arrow surfaces, the search will be continued for the term entered in the Search and Replace dialog. + +Select this icon to browse through bookmarks. + +Select this icon to browse through control fields. + +Select this icon to browse through drawing objects. + +Select this icon to browse through frames. + +Select this icon to browse through footnotes. + +Select this icon to browse through graphics. + +Select this icon to browse through index entries. + +Select this icon to browse through reminders. + +Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type. + +Select this icon to browse through OLE objects. + +Select this icon to browse through headings. + +Select this icon to browse through pages. + +Select this icon to browse through comments. + +Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type. + +Select this icon to browse through sections. + +Select this icon to browse through selections. + +Select this icon to browse through search results. + +Select this icon to browse through table formulas. + + +Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas. + +Select this icon to browse through tables. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a8681f8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + +AutoText +/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

AutoText

+Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3. + +
+You can also click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose the AutoText that you want to insert. +
+ +
+ +

AutoText

+The AutoText dialog lists the AutoText categories and entries. + +Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing +Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press CommandCtrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. +To display the list in reverse order, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab. + +Name +Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + +Shortcut +Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. +List box +Lists the AutoText categories. To view the AutoText entries in a category, double-click the category, or click the plus sign (+) in front of the category. To insert an AutoText entry into the current document, select the entry in the list, and then click Insert. +You can drag and drop AutoText entries from one category to another. +Insert +Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. +If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. + + +AutoText +Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document. + +New +Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command. + +New (text only) +Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command. + +Copy +Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard. + +Replace +Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document. + +Rename +Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. + + +Edit +Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close. + +Macro +Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. +You can also use the macros that are linked to some of the provided AutoText entries in AutoText entries that you create. The AutoText entries must be created with the "text only" option. For example, insert the string <field:company> in an AutoText entry, and $[officename] replaces the string with the contents of the corresponding database field. + +Import +Opens a dialog where you can select the 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import. + +Categories +Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. + + +Edit Categories +Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. + +Category +Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New. + +Path +Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files. + +New +Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box. + +Rename +Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box. + +Selection list +Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths. + + +Path +Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. +To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. +Save links relative to +Use this area to set the way $[officename] inserts links to the AutoText directory. + +File system +Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative. + +Internet +Links to files on the Internet are relative. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26ffb84cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rename AutoText +/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Rename AutoText + Allows you to change the name of an AutoText entry. +
+ +
+ Name + Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item. + New + Type the new name for the selected AutoText component. + Shortcut + Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1420907c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Bibliography Entry + /text/swriter/01/02130000.xhp + + + + + + + +Edit Bibliography Entry +Edits the selected bibliography entry. + +
+ +
+ +Entry + +Short name +Displays the abbreviation for the bibliography entry. + +Author, Title +Displays the author and title information contained in the bibliography entry. + +Apply +Applies the changes that you made, and then closes the Edit Bibliography Entry dialog. + +Close +Closes the dialog. + +New +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new entry. + +Edit +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can edit the current entry. + +Tips for working with bibliography entries. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6f51b126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Fields + /text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp + + + + + + + +

Edit Fields

+Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command. In the dialog, you can use the arrow buttons to move to the previous or the next field. +You can also double-click a field in your document to open the field for editing. + +
+ +
+To change the view between field names and field contents in your document, choose View - Field Names. +If you select a DDE link in your document, and then choose Edit - Fields, the Edit Links dialog opens. +If you click in front of a "sender" type field, and then choose Edit - Fields, the User data dialog opens. + +

Type

+Lists the type of field that you are editing. +The following dialog elements are only visible when the corresponding field type is selected. + +

Select

+Lists the field options, for example, "fixed". If you want, you can click another option for the selected field type. + + +

Format

+Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format. The formats that are available depend on the type of field that you are editing. + +

Offset

+Displays the offset for the selected field type, for example, for "Next Page," "Page Numbers" or "Previous Page". You can enter a new offset value which will be added to the displayed page number. +If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + +

Level

+Change the defined values and outline levels for the "Chapter" field type. + +

Name

+Displays the name of a field variable. If you want, you can enter a new name. + +

Value

+Displays the current value of the field variable. If you want, you can enter a new value. + + +

Condition

+Displays the condition that must be met for the field to be activated. If you want, you can enter a new condition. + +

Then, Else

+Change the field contents that are displayed depending on whether the field condition is met or not. + + +

Reference

+Insert or modify the reference text for the selected field. + +

Macro name

+Displays the name of the macro assigned to the selected field. + +

Placeholder

+Displays the placeholder text of the selected field. + +

Insert Text

+Displays the text that is linked to a condition. + +

Formula

+Displays the formula of a formula field. + + + + +

Database selection

+Select a registered database that you want to insert the selected field from. You can also change the table or query that the selected field refers to. + +

Record number

+Displays the database record number that is inserted when the condition specified for the "Any record" field type is met. + + +

Left Arrow

+Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document. This button is only active when a document contains more than one field of the same type. + + + + + Icon Previous Field + + + Previous Field + + +
+ + + +

Right Arrow

+Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document. This button is only active when a document contains more than one field of the same type. + + + + + Icon Next Field + + + Next Field + + +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81871eaba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Footnote or Endnote + /text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Edit Footnote or Endnote

+Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command. +
+ +
+ +
+To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the footnote area at the bottom of the page, or at the end of the document. +To quickly jump to the footnote or endnote text, click the anchor for note in the document. You can also position the cursor in front of or behind the marker, and then press CommandCtrl+Shift+PgDn. To jump back to the anchor for the note, press PgUp. + +

Numbering

+Select the numbering type for the footnote or endnote. + +

Auto

+ + +

Character

+ + +

Choose

+ +To change the format of a footnote or endnote anchor or text, select it, and then choose Format - Character. You can press Command+T +F11 to open the Styles window and modify the footnote or endnote paragraph style. + +

Type

+Select the type of note to insert, that is, footnote or endnote. A footnote is placed at the bottom of the current page, whereas an endnote is placed at the end of the document. + +

Footnote

+Converts an endnote to a footnote. + +

Endnote

+Converts a footnote to an endnote. + + +

Arrow left

+Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document. + + + + + Icon Previous footnote + + + Previous footnote + + +
+ + + +

Arrow right

+Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document. + + + + + Icon Next footnote + + + Next footnote + + +
+ + +Insert Footnote/Endnote dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ad7f5d43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Index Entry + /text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Index Entry

+Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command. +To insert an index entry, select a word in the document, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry. + +
+ +
+ +

Selection

+Edits the selected index entry. + + +

Index

+Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to. You cannot change the index type of an index entry in this dialog. Instead, you must delete the index entry from the document, and then insert it again in a different index type. + +

Entry

+Edit the index entry if necessary. When you modify the index entry, the new text only appears in the index, and not at the index entry anchor in the document. For example, you can enter an index with comments such as "Basics, see also General". + +

1st key

+To create a multilevel index, type the name of the first level index entry, or select a name from the list. The current index entry is added below this name. + +

2nd key

+Type the name of the second level index entry, or select a name from the list. The current index entry is added below this name. + +

Level

+Changes the outline level of a table of contents entry. + + + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted. + + +

End arrow to left

+Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon End arrow to left + + + End arrow to left + + +
+ + + +

End arrow to right

+Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon End arrow to right + + + End arrow to right + + +
+ + + +

Arrow to left

+Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon Left Arrow + + + Left Arrow + + +
+ + + +

Arrow to right

+Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document. + + + + + Icon Right Arrow + + + Right Arrow + + +
+ +You can jump quickly to index entries with the Navigation Bar. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0766b1c63 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Sections +/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Edit Sections +Changes the properties of sections defined in your document. To insert a section, select text or click in your document, and then choose Insert - Section. + +
+ +
+The Edit Sections dialog is similar to the Insert - Section dialog, and offers the following additional options: + +Section +Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list. If the cursor is currently in a section, the section name is displayed on the right side of the status bar at the bottom of the document window. +The current write protection status of a section is indicated by the lock symbol in front of the section name in the list. An open lock is unprotected and a closed lock is protected. Similarly, visible sections are indicated by a glasses symbol. +Options +Opens the Options dialog, where you can edit the column layout, background, footnote and endnote behavior of the selected section. If the section is password protected, you must enter the password first. + +Remove +Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd72ff252 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Rulers + /text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Rulers +Contains a submenu for showing or hiding the horizontal and vertical rulers. +
+ +Rulers +Show or hide the horizontal ruler and if activate, the vertical ruler. The horizontal ruler can be used to adjust page horizontal margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page. + +
+ +
+ +Vertical Ruler +Show or hide the vertical ruler. The vertical ruler can be used to adjust page vertical margins, table cells, and object heights on the page. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df47d5fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Text Boundaries + /text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Text Boundaries +Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23c707f80 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Field Shadings + /text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Field Shadings +Shows or hides shadings around fields in your document like non-breaking spaces, soft hyphens, indexes, and footnotes. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+Formatting Marks On/Off +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8125574c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Field Names + /text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Field Names +Switches between showing fields as field names or field values. When enabled the field names are displayed, and when disabled the field values displayed. Some field contents cannot be displayed. +
+ +
+ +
+To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area. +When you print a document with View - Field Names enabled, you are prompted to include the field names in the print out. + +
+Insert - Field. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e93b6f3bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Marks + /text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Formatting Marks

+Shows hidden formatting symbols in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces. +
+ +
+ +
+When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. +To specify which formatting marks are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display formatting area. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..808a7d170 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Web Layout + /text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Web Layout +Displays the document as it would be viewed in a Web browser. This is useful when you create HTML documents. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b486dc8b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Normal Layout + /text/swriter/01/03130000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Normal Layout +Displays how the document will look when you print it. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df3469006 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Field Hidden Paragraphs + /text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

Field Hidden Paragraphs

+Shows or hides hidden paragraphs. This option only affects the screen display of hidden paragraphs, and not the printing of hidden paragraphs. +
+ +
+ +
+To enable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in the Display fields area is selected. +Use the field command "Hidden Paragraph" to assign a condition that must be met to hide a paragraph. If the condition is not met, the paragraph is displayed. +When you hide a paragraph, footnotes and frames that are anchored to characters in the paragraph are also hidden. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bb0a94c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Manual Break + /text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp + + + + + + + + +manual break;next full line +manual break;right +manual break;clear right +clear right;manual break +manual break;clear left +manual break;left +clear left;manual break +manual break;next line + +

Insert Manual Break

+Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position. + +
+ +
+ +

Type

+Select the type of break that you want to insert. + + +

Line Break

+
+Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph. +The restart location specifies where the next line will start after a line break. +
+Possible values are below. +Original text layout: + + Original text layout + + + + + Value + + + Formatting Mark + + + Meaning + + + + + [None] + + + + Line break none + + + Continue right after the current line. + + Example of line break None (default) + + + + + Next Full Line + + + Line break full + + + Continue at the next full line, that is below all of the anchored objects intersecting with the current line. + + Example of line break Next full line + + + + + Left + + + Line break left + + + Continue at the next line which is unblocked on the left hand side. + + Example of Line break left + + + + + Right + + + Line break right + + + Continue at the next line which is unblocked on the right hand side. + + Example of Line break right + + + +
+The default value for the line break is none. + +You can also insert a default line break by pressing Shift+Enter. + + +

Column Break

+
+Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column. +Insert a column break by pressing CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter +
+ + +

Page Break

+Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page. +You can also insert a page break by pressing Command +Ctrl+Enter. However, if you want to assign the following page a different Page Style, you must use the menu command to insert the manual page break. + + +

Page Style

+Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break. +To switch between landscape and portrait orientation, choose the Default Page Style to apply portrait orientation or the Landscape style to apply landscape orientation. + + +

Change page number

+Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break. + + +

Page number

+Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break. +To display manual breaks, choose View - Nonprinting Characters. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8a5b999c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Insert Section +/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

+Insert Section +

+ +Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose this command to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply custom column layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met. + +
+ +
+You can insert an entire document in a section, or a named section from another. You can also insert a section as a DDE link. +To edit a section, choose Format - Sections. +The Insert Section dialog contains the following tabs: + + + + + +

Insert

+Inserts the section that you defined at the current cursor position in the document. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a08febae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + +Section +/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+sections;inserting sections by DDE +DDE; command for inserting sections + + + + + +Section +Sets the properties of the section. +
+
+ +
+ + +New Section +Type a name for the new section. By default, $[officename] automatically assigns the name "Section X" to new sections, where X is a consecutive number. +Link + + +Link +Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section. + + +DDEUFI: WIN only, while fixing #109638# +Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected. +
+The general syntax for a DDE command is: "<Server> <Topic> <Item>", where server is the DDE name for the application that contains the data. Topic refers to the location of the Item (usually the file name), and Item represents the actual object. +
+ For example, to insert a section named "Section1" from a $[officename] text document abc.odt as a DDE link, use the command: "soffice x:\abc.odt Section1". To insert the contents of the first cell from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file called "abc.xls", use the command: "excel x:\[abc.xls]Sheet1 z1s1". You can also copy the elements that you want to insert as a DDE link, and then Edit - Paste Special. You can then view the DDE command for the link, by selecting the contents and choosing Edit - Fields. + + +File name / DDE command + +Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button to locate the file. If the DDE check box is selected, enter the DDE command that you want to use. + + + +Browse +Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert. + + +Section +Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link. +When you open a document that contains linked sections, you are prompted to update the links. +Write Protection + + +Protect +Prevents the selected section from being edited. + + +With password +Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters. + + +Password +Opens a dialog where you can change the current password. +Hide + + +Hide +Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed. The components of a hidden sections appear gray in the Navigator. When you rest your mouse pointer over a hidden component in the Navigator, the Help tip "hidden" is displayed. +You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on a page, or in a header, footer, footnote, frame, or table cell. + + +With condition +Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section. A condition is a logical expression, such as "SALUTATION EQ Mr.". For example, if you use the mail merge form letter feature to define a database field called "Salutation" that contains "Mr.", "Ms.", or "Sir or Madam", you can then specify that a section will only be printed if the salutation is "Mr.". +Another example would be to create the field variable "x" and set its value to 1. Then specify a condition based on this variable for hiding a section, such as: "x eq 1". If you want to display the section, set the value of the variable "x" to "0". +Properties +You see this area of the dialog when the current document is an XForms document. +Editable in read-only document +Select to allow editing of the section's contents even if the document is opened in read-only mode. + +Field commands +Syntax for conditions + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a21a26d93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Indents (Sections) +/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Indents

+Indents the section with a left and right margin. +
+
+ +
+ +

Before section

+Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin. + +

After section

+Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin. +
+ +Field commands +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6abcc8a44 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Footnote/Endnote +/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp + + + + + + + + +Footnote/Endnote +Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position. You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol. + +The following applies to both footnotes and endnotes. + +Footnotes are inserted at the end of a page, and endnotes are inserted at the end of a document. +UFI: what about sections? Will endnotes be placed there? +
+ +
+Numbering +Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes. + +Automatic +Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert. To change the settings for automatic numbering, choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes. + + + +Character +Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter, number or special character. + +Choose +Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor. + +Type +Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering. + +Footnote +Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page. + +Endnote +Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f16025c79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Bookmark + /text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp + + + + + + bookmarks;inserting + +UFI: added "bookmarks;inserting" index + + + + +

Insert Bookmark

+Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time. In an HTML document, bookmarks are converted to anchors that you can jump to from a hyperlink. + +
+ +
+To jump to a specific bookmark, press F5 to open the Navigator, click the plus sign (+) next to the Bookmarks entry, and then double-click the bookmark. + +You can also right-click the Page Number field at the left end of the Status Bar at the bottom of the document window, and then choose the bookmark that you want to jump to. + +

Name

+Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. Then, click Insert. +You cannot use the following characters in a bookmark name: / \ @ : * ? " ; , . # + +

Bookmarks

+Lists all the bookmarks in the current document. + +

Rename

+To rename a bookmark, select the bookmark, press Rename, then type the new name in the dialog box. + +

Delete

+To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow. +If bookmarks are protected, then they cannot be deleted or renamed. + +

Go to

+To move the cursor in the document to a bookmark, select the bookmark, then press Go to. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..516870d83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Caption + /text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp + + + + + + + + + +
+ +Caption +Adds a numbered caption to a selected image, table, chart, frame, or shape. You can also access this command by right-clicking the item that you want to add the caption to. +
+ +
+ +
+ +Properties +Set the caption options for the current selection. + + +Category +Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name. For example, the "Illustration" caption category is formatted with the "Illustration" paragraph style. + + +Numbering +Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption. + + +Caption +Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number. + + +Separator +Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text. +moved help id to here + +Position +Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects. + +Options + + + +AutoCaption +Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialog box. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8189ce30f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Options +Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document. + +
+ +
+ + +Numbering by chapter +When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading is encountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be "Figure 2.1". + +Level +Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label. + +Separator +Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. +Category and frame format + +Character style +Specifies the character style. + +Apply border and shadow +Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b1ad5fef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Envelope + /text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp + + + +inserting;envelopes + letters;inserting envelopes + envelopes +MW made "envelopes;" a one level entry + +Envelope + Creates an envelope. On three tab pages, you can specify the addressee and sender, the position and format for both addresses, the size of the envelope, and the envelope orientation. + +
+ +
+ + + + +New doc. + Creates a new document and inserts the envelope. + +Insert + Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document. + + To delete an envelope from a document + + + Click into the envelope page to make it the current page. + + + Right-click the field on the status line that shows "Envelope". + A submenu opens showing some page styles. + + + Choose the "Default" page style from the submenu. + This removes the special "Envelope" page formatting. + + + Delete the frames for sender and recipient. Click the border of each frame and press the Del key. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b54da535 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Envelope +/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Envelope + Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database. +
+
+ +
+ Addressee + Enter the delivery address. You can also click in this box, and select a database, a table, and field, and then click the arrow button to insert the field in the address. If you want, you can apply formatting, such as bold and underline, to the address text. + +Sender + Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return address. $[officename] automatically inserts your user data in the Sender box, but you can also enter the data that you want. + Database + Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert. + Table + Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert. + Database field + Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60c14049c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Format +/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp + + + +
+ + +Format +Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope. +
+
+ +
+Addressee +Sets the position and the text formatting options of the addressee field. +Position +Sets the position of the recipient's address on the envelope. +from left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field. +from top +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field. +Edit +Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit. +Character +Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the addressee field. +Paragraph +Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the addressee field. +Sender +Sets the position and the text formatting options of the sender field. +Position +Sets the position of the sender's address on the envelope. +from left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field. +from top +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field. +Edit +Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit. +Character +Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the sender field. +Paragraph +Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the sender field. +Size +Select the envelope size format that you want to use, or create a custom size. +Format +Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size. +Width +Enter the width of the envelope. +Height +Enter the height of the envelope. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbc3e3124 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printer +/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Printer +Set the print options for the envelope. +
+
+ +
+Consult the documentation that came with your printer for setting up the printer for envelopes. Depending on the printer model, envelopes may have to be placed left, right, in the middle, and either face up or face down. + +Horizontal left +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray. + +Horizontal center +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the center of the printer tray. + +Horizontal right +Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray. + +Vertical left +Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray. + +Vertical center +Feeds the envelope vertically from the center of the printer tray. + +Vertical right +Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray. + +Print from top +Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray. + +Print from bottom +Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray. + +Shift right +Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right. + +Shift down +Enter the amount to shift the print area down. +Current printer +Displays the name of the current printer. + +Setup +Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6bf15121 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Fields +/text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp + + + + + +

Fields

+Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The dialog lists all available fields. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +

Insert

+Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button. +Closes the dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6ff3328e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + + Document (Fields) + /text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + +

Document

+Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, user data, date, and time. +
+ +
+ +
+ +To insert a field in your document, first select the field Type, then click in the Select list, to choose which information item should be inserted, then click Insert. + +
+ + +

Type

+Lists the available field types. +
+ +
+ + +

Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection"

+Lists what information can be inserted for a selected field type. + +
+

Available field Types and Select lists

+ + + + Type + + + Select list + + + + + Author + + + Name or initials of current user (as entered in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data). + + + + + Chapter + + + Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name. + + + + + Date + + + Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9. + + + + + File name + + + Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as well as the filename without extension. + + + + + Page + + + Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page. + + + + + Paragraph Signature + + + Inserts a meta-data field with a digital signature for the paragraph. You must have a digital certificate to sign a paragraph. + + + + + + Sender + + + Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + + + + + Statistics + + + Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. + + + + + Templates + + + Inserts the filename, the filename without the file extension, the path, or the path and filename of the current template. You can also insert the Template name and Category of the current template. + + + + + Time + + + Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9. + + +
+ +To quickly insert a field from the Select list, double-click the field. + +
+ +

Format

+If a field is displaying a date, time or number, then Format is used to customize the appearance of the date, time, or number. Common formats are shown in the Format window, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +
+When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. +If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Chapter numbering are not displayed. +If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. + + +Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. +For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used. + + + +

Level

+Enter outline level of the chapter to be displayed. The inserted field will display the value taken from last paragraph with the specified outline level placed before the inserted field. + + +
+ +

Offset

+Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1". +
+With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty. +If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + +

Offset in days/minutes

+Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..513b5fcc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + + + + + +Cross-references +/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp + + + +
+
+ + + +

Cross-reference

+This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document. + +
+The advantage of entering a cross-reference as a field is that you do not have to adjust the references manually every time you change the document. Just update the fields with F9 and the references in the document are updated too. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Type

+Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: + + + +Type + + +Meaning + + + + +Set Reference + + +Set target for a referenced field. Under Name, enter a name for the reference. When inserting the reference, the name will then appear as an identification in the list box Selection. +In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For the target in HTML documents, you have to insert a bookmark. + + + + +Insert Reference + + +Inserting a reference to another position in the document. The corresponding text position has to be defined with "Set Reference" first. Otherwise, inserting a reference by choosing a field name under Selection is not possible. +In master documents, you can also reference from one sub-document to another. Note that the reference name will not appear in the selection field and has to be entered "by hand". +In an HTML document, reference fields entered this way will be ignored. For referenced fields in HTML documents, you have to insert a hyperlink. + + + + +Headings + + +The Selection box shows a list of all headings in the order of their appearance in the document. + + + + +Numbered Paragraphs + + +The Selection box shows a list of all ordered paragraphs in the order of their appearance in the document. The list includes: + + + paragraphs with a paragraph style assigned a numbering scheme in the Tools > Chapter Numbering dialog + + + + ordered list paragraphs, formatted with the Formatting toolbar or Bullets and Numbering dialog + + + paragraphs formatted with a numbered list style + + + paragraphs formatted with a paragraph style with a numbered list style applied in the Outline & List tab. + + + + + + +Bookmarks + + +After inserting a bookmark in the document with Insert - Bookmark, the bookmarks entry on the References tab becomes usable. Bookmarks are used to mark certain text passages in a document. In a text document, you can use the bookmarks, for example, to jump from one passage in the document to another. +In an HTML document, these bookmarks become anchors <A name>, which determine the target of hyperlinks for example. + + + + +Footnotes + + +If your documents contains a footnote, you can select the Footnotes entry. A reference to a footnote returns the footnote number. + + + + +(Inserted objects with captions) + + +You can set references to objects that have captions applied. For example, insert a picture, right-click the picture, choose Caption. Now the object shows up as a numbered "Illustration" in the list. + + +
+ +References are fields. To remove a reference, delete the field. If you set a longer text as a reference and you do not want to reenter it after deleting the reference, select the text and copy it to the clipboard. You can then reinsert it as "unformatted text" at the same position using the command Edit - Paste special. The text remains intact while the reference is deleted. + + +

Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection"

+Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Refer using" list, and then click Insert. +To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down CommandCtrl and double-click the field. +
+In the Refer using list, click the format that you want to use. + +

Refer using

+Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field. The following formats are available: + + + +Format + + +Meaning + + + + +Page number (unstyled) + + +Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target. + + + + +Referenced text + + +Inserts the complete reference target text. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + + + + +“Above”/“Below” + + +Inserts "above" or "below", depending on the location of the reference target relative to the position of the reference field. + + + + +Page number (styled) + + +Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target using the format specified in the page style. + + + + +Number + + +Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including superior levels depending on the context. See note below this table for more information. + + + + +Number (no context) + + +Inserts only the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. + + + + +Number (full context) + + +Inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph, including all superior levels. + + + + +Chapter + + +Inserts the number of the chapter containing the reference target. + + + + +Category and Number + + +Inserts the category (caption type) and the number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. + + + + +Caption Text + + +Inserts the caption label of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. + + + + +Numbering + + +Inserts the caption number of the reference target. This option is only available when the reference target is an object with a caption. + + +
+ +The "Number" format inserts the number of the heading or numbered paragraph. The superior levels are included depending on the context, as necessary. +For example, when you are in a chapter 1, subchapter 2, subpart 5, this may be numbered as 1.2.5. When you insert here a reference to text in the previous subpart "1.2.4" and you apply the "Number" format, then the reference will be shown as "4". If in this example the numbering is set to show more sublevels, the same reference will be shown as "2.4" or "1.2.4", depending on the setting. If you use the "Number (full context)" format, you will always see "1.2.4", no matter how the numbered paragraph is formatted. +
+
+
+ +

Name

+
+Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. To set a target, click "Set Reference" in the Type list, type a name in this box, and then click Insert. To reference the new target, click the target name in the Selection list. +
+In a master document, targets that are in different sub-documents are not displayed in the Selection list. If you want to insert a reference to the target, you must type the path and the name in the Name box. + +Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined fields. +
+

Value

+Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. +
+If you select text in the document, and then insert a reference, the selected text becomes the contents of the field that you insert.Value box (always disabled) + +Edit the value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38f9e93b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + +Functions +/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp + + + +
+

Functions

+ + +Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select. + + +Depending on the field type that you select, you can assign conditions to certain functions. For example, you can define a field that executes a macro when you click the field in the document, or a condition that, when met, hides a field. You can also define placeholder fields that insert graphics, tables, frames and other objects into your document when needed. +
+
+ +
+ +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + +Type + + +Meaning + + + + +Conditional text + + +Inserts text if a certain condition is met. For example, enter "sun eq 1" in the Condition box, and then the text that you want to insert when the variable "sun" equals "1" in the Then box. If you want, you can also enter the text that you want to display when this condition is not met in the Else box. To define the variable "sun", click the Variables tab, select "Set variable", type "sun" in the Name box, and its value in the Value box. + + + + +Input list + + + Inserts a text field that displays one item from a list. You can add, edit, and remove items, and change their order in the list. Click an Input list field in your document or press CommandCtrl+Shift+F9 to display the Choose Item dialog. + + + + +Input field + + +Inserts a text field that you can open by clicking it in the document. You can then change the text that is displayed. + + + + +Execute macro + + +Inserts a text field that runs a macro when you click the field in the document. To assign a macro to the field, click the Macro button. + + + + +Placeholder + + +Inserts a placeholder field in the document, for example, for graphics. When you click a placeholder field in the document, you are prompted to insert the item that is missing. + + + + +Hidden text + + +Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View and clear the Hidden text check box. + + + + +Hidden Paragraph + + +Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. + + + + +Combine characters + + +Combines up to 6 characters, so that they behave as a single character. This feature is only available when Asian fonts are supported. + + +
+
+The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list. +
+ + +

Format

+For function fields, the format field is only used for fields of the type placeholder. Here, the format determines the object for which the placeholder stands. +
+

Condition

+For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. +
+ + +

Then, Else

+Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box. +You can also insert database fields in the Then and Else boxes using the format "databasename.tablename.fieldname". +If the table or the field name does not exist in a database, nothing is inserted. +If you include the quotes in "databasename.tablename.fieldname", the expression is inserted as text. +
+

Reference

+Type the text that you want to display in the field. If you are inserting a placeholder field, type the text that you want to display as a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field. +
+

FormatUFI: see spec "Macro Selector..."

+Select the macro that you want to run when the field is clicked. +

Macro name

+Displays the name of the selected macro. +

Placeholder

+Type the text that you want to appear in the placeholder field. +

Hidden text

+Type the text that you want to hide if a condition is met. +

Characters

+Enter the characters that you want to combine. You can combine a maximum of 6 characters. This option is only available for the Combine characters field type. +

Value

+Enter a value for the selected field. +
+ +

Macro

+Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document. This button is only available for the "Execute macro" function field. +
+The following controls are displayed for Input list fields: + +

Item

+Enter a new item. + +

Add

+Adds the Item to the list. + +

Items on list

+Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document. + +

Remove

+Removes the selected item from the list. + +

Move Up

+Moves the selected item up in the list. + +

Move Down

+Moves the selected item down in the list. + +

Name

+Enter a unique name for the Input list. + + +

Choose Item

+This dialog is shown when you click an Input list field in the document. +Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK. + +

Edit

+Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list. + +

Next

+Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available. You see this button when you open the Choose Item dialog by CommandCtrl+Shift+F9. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3af7f363 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + +DocInformation +/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp + + + +
+ + +

DocInformation

+DocInformation fields contain information about the properties of a document, such as the date a document was created. To view the properties of a document, choose File - Properties. +
+
+ +
+When you export and import an HTML document containing DocInformation fields, special $[officename] formats are used. + +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + +Type + + +Meaning + + + + +Comments + + + Inserts the comments as entered in the Description tab page of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Created + + + Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time when the document was created. + + + + +Custom + + + Inserts the contents of the properties found on the Custom Properties tab of the File - Properties dialog. (Only shown if Custom properties are added.) + + + + +Keywords + + + Inserts the keywords as entered in the Description tab of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Last printed + + + Inserts the name of the author, and the date or time that the document was last printed. + + + + +Modified + + + Inserts the name of the author, and the date, or the time of the last save. + + + + +Revision number + + + Inserts the version number of the current document. + + + + +Subject + + + Inserts the subject as entered in the Description tab of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Title + + + Inserts the title as entered in the Description tab of the File - Properties dialog. + + + + +Total editing time + + + Inserts the amount of time spent on editing a document. + + +
+ + +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. + +For the "Created", "Modified", and "Last printed" field types, you can include the author, date, and time of the corresponding operation. + +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. + + +
+ +

Fixed content

+Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. +
+Fields with fixed content are only evaluated when you create a new document from a template that contains such a field. For example, a date field with fixed content inserts the date that a new document was created from the template. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c2a1188d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + +Variables (fields) +/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp + + + +
+user-defined fields, restriction + + + +

Variables

+Variable fields let you add dynamic content to your document. For example, you can use a variable to reset the page numbering. +
+
+ +
+ + +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + + +Type + + +Description + + + + +Set Variable + + +Defines a variable and its value. You can change the value of a variable by clicking in front of the variable field, and then choosing Edit - Field. + + + + +Show Variable + + +Inserts the current value of the variable that you click in the Select list. + + + + +DDE field + + +Inserts a DDE link into the document, that you can update as often as you want through the assigned name. + + + + +Insert Formula + + +Inserts a fixed number, or the result of a formula. + + + + +Input field + + +Inserts a new value for a variable or a User Field. +The value of a variable in an Input field is only valid from where the field is inserted and onwards. To change the value of the variable later in the document, insert another Input field of the same name, but with a different value. However, the value of a User Field is changed globally. +The variables are displayed in the Select field. When you click the Insert button, the dialog Review Fields appears, where you can enter the new value or additional text as a remark. + + + + +Number range + + +Inserts automatic numbering for tables, graphics, or frames. + + + + +Set page variable + + +Inserts a reference point in the document, after which the page count restarts. Select "on" to enable the reference point, and "off" to disable it. You can also enter an offset to start the page count at a different number. + + + + +Show page variable + + +Displays the number of pages from the "Set page variable" reference point to this field. + + + + +User Field + + +Inserts a custom global variable. You can use the User Field to define a variable for a condition statement. When you change a User Field, all instances of the variable in the document are updated. + + +
+
+ +

Select

on all tab pages this is called "Select", except for "Cross-References", which uses "Selection" +Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. +
+To quickly insert a field from the Select list, hold down CommandCtrl and double-click the field. + +Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +Provides Format header and explanation + +Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. +Provides Name header and explanation + This option is available for "Set variable", "DDE field", "Number range" and "User Field" field types. +User-defined fields are only available in the current document. + +Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. + + +In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number. +Warns that following types depend on the selection in the Type list +In an HTML document, two additional fields are available for the "Set variable" field type: HTML_ON and HTML_OFF. The text that you type in the Value box is converted to an opening HTML tag (<Value>) or to a closing HTML (</Value>) tag when the file is saved as an HTML document, depending on the option that you select. +

DDE Statement

+taken from DDE in Section +This option is only available if the "DDE field" field type is selected. +

Formula

+This option is only available if the "Insert Formula" field type is selected. + + +This option is only available if the "Set page variable" field type is selected. +
+ +

Invisible

+Hides the field contents in the document. The field is inserted as a thin gray mark in the document. This option is only available for the "Set Variable" and "User Field" field types. +
+

Numbering by Chapter

+Sets the options for resetting chapter numbers. + +

Level

+Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document. + +

Separator

+Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels. +Numbering by Chapter, Level and Separator are only available for the "Number range" field type. +
+ +

Apply

+Adds the user-defined field to the Select list. + +
+
+ +Delete +Removes the user-defined field from the select list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document. To remove a field that is used in the current document from the list, first delete all instances of the field in the document, and then remove it from the list. + + + +Icon + + +Delete + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a88c9583 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + +Database +/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp + + + +
+ + +Database +You can insert fields from any database, for example, address fields, into your document. +
+
+ +
+ +Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. + + + + +Field type + + +Meaning + + + + +Any Record + + +Inserts the contents of the database field that you specify in the Record Number box as a mail merge field if the Condition that you enter is met. Only records selected by a multiple selection in the data source view are considered. +You can use this field to insert several records into a document. Simply insert the Any Record field in front of the form letter fields that use a certain record. + + + + +Database Name + + +Inserts the name of the database table selected in the Database selection box. The "Database Name" field is a global field, that is, if you insert a different database name in your document, the contents of all previously inserted "Database Name" fields are updated. + + + + +Mail merge field + + +Inserts the name of a database field as a placeholder, so that you can create a mail merge document. The field content is automatically inserted when you print the form letter. + + + + +Next record + + +Inserts the contents of the next mail merge field in your document, if the condition that you define is met. The records that you want to include must be selected in the data source view. +You can use the "Next record" field to insert the contents of consecutive records between the mail merge fields in a document. + + + + +Record number + + +Inserts the number of the selected database record. + + +
+ + +Database Selection +Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to. You can include fields from more than one database or query in a document. + +For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. + +If you want, you can assign a condition that must be met before the contents of the "Any Record" and "Next Record" fields are inserted. The default condition is "True", that is, the condition is always true if you do not change the condition text. + +Record number +Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. +If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. +Format +Select the format of the field that you want to insert. This option is available for numerical, boolean, date and time fields.see #i64135 + +From database +Uses the format defined in the selected database. + +Browse +Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list. + +User defined +Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats. + + +List of user-defined formats +Lists the available user-defined formats. + +Printing a form letter +When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..829009a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + +Special Tags +/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tags; in $[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer; special HTML tags +HTML;special tags for fields +fields;HTML import and export +time fields;HTML +date fields;HTML +DocInformation fields +MW changed "$[officename] Writer;tags" to "$[officename];special HTML tags" +Special Tags +When you save a document that contains fields as an HTML document, $[officename] automatically converts date, time, and DocInformation fields to special HTML tags. The field contents are inserted between the opening and closing HTML tags of the converted fields. These special HTML tags do not correspond to standard HTML tags. +$[officename] Writer fields are identified by the <SDFIELD> tag in an HTML document. The field type, the format, and the name of the special field are included in the opening HTML tag. The format of a field tag that is recognized by an HTML filter depends on the field type. +
+Date and Time Fields +For "Date" and "Time" fields, the TYPE parameter equals DATETIME. The format of the date or the time is specified by the SDNUM parameter, for example, DD:MM:YY for dates, or HH:MM:SS for time. +For fixed date and time fields, the date or the time is specified by the SDVAL parameter. +Examples of date and time special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: + + + +Fields + + +$[officename] Tag + + + + +Date is fixed + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4239988426" SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Date is variable + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Time is fixed + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4240335648" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> + + + + +Time is variable + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> + + +
+ +
+
+DocInformation Fields +For DocInformation fields, the TYPE parameter equals DOCINFO. The SUBTYPE parameter displays the specific field type, for example, for the "Created" DocInformation field, SUBTYPE=CREATE. For date and time DocInformation fields, the FORMAT parameter equals DATE or TIME, and the SDNUM parameter indicates the number format that is used. The SDFIXED parameter indicates if the content of the DocInformation field is fixed or not. +The contents of a fixed date or time field are equal to the SDVAL parameter, otherwise the contents are equal to the text found between the SDFIELD HTML tags. +Examples of DocInformation special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: + + + +Fields + + +$[officename] Tag + + + + +Description (fixed content) + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=COMMENT SDFIXED>Description</SDFIELD> + + + + +Creation date + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;QQ YY">1. Quarter 98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Creation time (fixed content) + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=TIME SDVAL="0" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS AM/PM" SDFIXED>03:58:35 PM</SDFIELD> + + + + +Modification date + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CHANGE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;NN DD MMM, YY">Mo 23 Feb, 98</SDFIELD> + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..935104d45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Input Field +/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Input Field +Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. +To change the content of an Input Field in a document, click the field, and then edit the text in the lower box of the dialog. + +Reference +This box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box on the Functions or Variables tab of the Fields dialog. The box underneath displays the contents of the field. + +Next +Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8ff2a5a16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,447 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Conditions + /text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp + + + +logical expressions + formulating conditions + conditions; in fields and sections + fields;defining conditions + sections;defining conditions + variables; in conditions + user data;in conditions + databases;in conditions + hiding; database fields + +

Defining Conditions +

+ Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. + You can define conditions for the following field types: + + + Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. + + + Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. + + + Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. + + + Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. + + + The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: + + + + TRUE + + + The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. + + + + + FALSE + + + The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. + + +
+ + If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. + When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. + You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: + + + Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties + + + Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field + + + Variables based on user data + + + Variables based on the contents of database fields + + + You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. +

Conditions and Variables

+ The following examples use a variable called "x": + + + + x == 1 or x EQ 1 + + + The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. + + + + + x != 1 or x NEQ 1 + + + The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. + + + + + sinx == 0 + + + The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. + + +
+ + To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: + + + + x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" + + + Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). + + + + + x == "" or x EQ "" + or + !x or NOT x + + + Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. + + +
+ + The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. +

User Data

+ You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). + The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: + + + + Variable + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + Email address + + + + + user_state + + + State (not in all $[officename] versions) + + +
+ + For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". +

Conditions and Database Fields

+ You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: + + + + Example + + + Meaning + + + + + Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company NEQ "" + Database.Table.Company != "" + + + The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) + + + + + !Database.Table.Company + NOT Database.Table.Company + Database.Table.Company EQ "" + Database.Table.Company =="" + + + Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. + + + + + Database.Table.Company !="Sun" + Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun" + + + Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is not "Sun". (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) + + + + + Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name + + + Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. + + +
+ + Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). + When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# +

Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field

+ You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. + Select the Hidden Paragraph list entry, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" + or type the following + NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company + If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. + To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. +

Examples of Conditions in Fields

+ The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. +

To display conditional text based on the number of pages:

+ + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Conditional text". + + + In the Condition box, type "page == 1". + + + In the Then box, type "There is only one page". + + + In the Or box, type "There are several pages". + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + +

To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable

+ + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Set Variable". + + + In the Name box, type "Profit". + + + In the Value box, type "5000". + + + Click Insert. + + + Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". + + + In the Then box, type "Target is not met". + + + In the Or box, type "Target is met". + + + Click Insert. + + + To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. +

To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field:

+ The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Database tab. + + + In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". + + + In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". + + + In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: + + + Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". + + + In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. + + + You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. + + + In the Type box, click "Conditional text". + + + In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" + + + In the Then box, type "Dear". + + + In the Else box, type "Hello". + + + Click Insert. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36e8d43d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Edit fields (variables) + /text/swriter/01/04090300.xhp + + + + +
+ + + + + + + fields;editing + edit;fields + +

Edit Fields (variables)

+ Edit field contents. +
+
+ Choose Edit Fields of the context menu of the selected field. +
+

Type

+ Shows the type of the selected field. + select heading + Provides Format header and explanation + + + apply control +

Arrow buttons

+ Use the arrow buttons to go to next or previous field of same type in the document. +

Edit

+ When visible, opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. The dialog depends on the type of the field. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e25fb59e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Table of Contents and Index + /text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +Table of Contents and Index +Opens a menu to insert an index or bibliography entry, as well as inserting a table of contents, index, and or bibliography. +
+ +
+ +
+ +Index Entry + + +Bibliography Entry + + +Table of Content, Index or Bibliography + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41b90158e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Index Entry +/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Insert Index Entry +Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry. + +
+ +
+To edit an index entry, place the cursor in front of the index field, and then choose Edit - Reference - Index Entry...removed a para - see #i64023 +You can leave the Insert Index Entry dialog open while you select and insert entries. +Selection + +Index +Select the index that you want to add the entry to. + +Entry +Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed. + +1st key +Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold". + +2nd key +Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold". +
+ +Phonetic reading +Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled. +
+ +Main Entry +Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index. $[officename] displays the page number of the main entry in a different format than the other entries in the index. + +Level +Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style. +This option is available only for table of contents and user-defined index entries. + +Apply to all similar texts +Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included. +You cannot use the function for an Entry that you entered manually in this dialog. +To include all occurrences of a text passage in an index, select the text, choose Edit - Find & Replace, and click Find All. Then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry and click Insert. + +Match case + + +Whole words only + + +Insert +Marks an index entry in your text. + +Close +Closes the dialog. + +New user-defined index +Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index. + +Name +Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables. + +Using Tables of Content and Indexes + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..976c11982 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography +/text/swriter/01/04120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography

+ Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. To edit an index or table of contents, place the cursor in the index or table of contents, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. +
+ +
+ You can also preview the index or table in this dialog. + Depending on the type of index or table that you select, the following tabs are present. + + + + + Use this tab to specify the column layout for the index or table of contents. By default, the index title is one-column wide and extends out from left page margin. + + + Using Tables of Content and Indexes + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21431e1cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Styles +/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Styles +You can assign different paragraph styles to change the formatting of index titles, separators and index entries. You can also modify paragraph styles in this dialog. +
+
+ +
+Assignment + +Levels +Select the index level that you change the formatting of. + +Paragraph Styles +Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button. + +< +Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style. + +Default +Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style. + +Edit +Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebd512dab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Type +/text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Type + Use this tab to specify and define the type of index that you want to insert. You can also create custom indexes. +
+
+ +
+ Depending on the type of index that you select, this tab contains the following options. + Table of Contents + + Alphabetical Index + + Illustration Index + + Index of Tables + + User-Defined + + Table of Objects + + Bibliography + + + Using Tables of Content and Indexes + Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4723157aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Index + /text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp + + + + + +

Index

+ The following options are available when you select Table of Contents as the index type. + +
+ +
+
+

Type and Title

+ Specify the type and title of the index. + +

Type

+ Select the type of index that you want to insert or edit. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that you select. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography, you can then edit that index. + +

Title

+ Enter a title for the selected index. + +

Protected against manual changes

+ Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the Enable cursor check box in the Protected Areas section. +
+
+ +

Create Index or Table of Contents

+

For

+ Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter. +
+ +

Evaluate up to level

+ Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index. +

Create from

+ Use this area to specify which information to include in an index. + +

Outline

+ Creates the index using outline levels. Paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index. + You can also assign outline levels to paragraphs in the Outline & List tab page of the Format - Paragraph dialog. + +

Additional Styles

+ Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box. + +You can include the Figure Index Heading or Bibliography Heading styles, as well as any other relevant heading style, to the Table of Contents. +
+ +

Assign styles

+Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index. Choose the proper heading level on which the style will be included in the index. +
+ +
+ +

Index marks

+ Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry in the index. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c623eb659 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index +The following options are available when you select Alphabetical Index as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + +Options + +Combine identical entries +Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43". + +Combine identical entries with f or ff +Replaces identical index entries that occur on the directly following page(s), with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "f" or "ff". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11" are combined as "View 10f", and "View 10, View 11, View 12" as "View 10ff". Actual appearance depends on the locale setting, but can be overridden with Sort - Language. + +Combine with - +Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12". + +Case sensitive +Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies. If you want the first occurrence of the entry in the document to determine the case of the entry, select Combine identical entries. +To use multi-level collation to Asian languages, select Case sensitive. In the multi-level collation, the cases and diacritics of the entries are ignored and only the primitive forms of the entries are compared. If the forms are identical, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still identical, the cases of the forms as well as the widths of the characters, and the differences in the Japanese Kana are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + +AutoCapitalize entries +Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry. + +Keys as separate entries +Inserts index keys as separate index entries. A key is inserted as a top level index entry and the entries that are assigned to the key as indented subentries. +To define an index key, choose Insert Index Entry dialog. + +Concordance file +Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index. + +File +Select, create, or edit a concordance file. +
+Sort +Sets the options for sorting the index entries. + +Language +Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries. + +Key type +Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c3ef3b4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select the Illustration Index as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + +
+Create from +Specify the information to be combined to form an index. + +Captions +Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + +Category +Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries. + +Display +Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user. + + + +Selections in the Display list box + + +Entry in the Index + + + + +Reference Text + + +Illustration 24: The Sun + + + + +Category and Number + + +Illustration 24 + + + + +Caption + + +The Sun + + +
+ +If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in the index entry. + +Object names +Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b10ca371 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select Index of Tables as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7ec6ff09 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select User-Defined as the index type. + +
+ +
+User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document. + + +Create from +Styles + + + + +Tables +Includes tables in the index. + +Graphics +Includes graphics in the index. + +Frames +Includes frames in the index. + +OLE objects +Includes OLE objects in the index. + +Use level from source chapter +Indents table, graphic, frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. + +Defining an index entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9550c6a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select Table of Objects as the index type. + +
+ +
+ + + +Create from the following objects +Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89d479099 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index + +The following options are available when you select Bibliography as the index type. + +
+ +
+ +Formatting of the entries + +Number entries +Automatically numbers the bibliography entries. To set the sorting options for the numbering, click the Entries tab. + +Brackets +Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00bd71569 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Assign Styles +/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + Assign Styles + Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles. +
+ +
+ Styles + The list contains the paragraph styles that you can assign to index levels. + To create an index entry from a paragraph style, click the style in the Styles list, and then click the >> button to move the style to the index level that you want. + << + Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy. + >> + Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..378484461 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Entries (indexes/tables) +/text/swriter/01/04120220.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Entries (indexes/tables) + Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Type tab. +
+
+ +
+ Table of Contents + Alphabetical Index + Illustration Index + Index of Tables + User-Defined + Table of Objects + Bibliography + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6404ec33f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + Entries (table of contents) + /text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp + + + + + + +Entries (table of contents) +Specify the format of the entries in the table of contents. + +
+ +
+ +
+ +Level +Select the level that you want to define. +
+ +
+ +Structure and formatting +The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you can enter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click a code button.this line also appears for bibliographic index + +Displays the remainder of the Structure line.UFI: see #i27934# + + + + To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key. + + + To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button. + + + + + To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button. + +
+ +
+ + +Chapter number (E#) +Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Chapter Numbering. +
+ +
+ + +Entry text (E) +Inserts the text of the chapter heading. +
+ +
+ + +Tab stop (T) +Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box. +
+ +
+ + +Page number (#) +Inserts the page number of the entry. +
+ + + Hyperlink (LS and LE) +Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents. + + +All +Applies the current settings to all levels without closing the dialog. + +
+ + +Character Style +Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line. + + +Edit +Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style. + + +Fill character +Select the tab leader that you want use. + + +Tab stop position +Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop. + + +Align right +Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin. +
+ +
+ + +Format +Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator. + + + +Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent +Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5af1cbc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (alphabetical index) +/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp + + + +Entries (alphabetical index) +Specify the format of the alphabetical index entries. + +
+ +
+ +Level "S" refers to the single letter headings that divide the index entries alphabetically. To enable these headings, select the Alphabetical delimiter check box in the Format area. + + + +
+Chapter Info +Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box. +Chapter entry +Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry. +
+Evaluate up to level +Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index. +
+
+ + + +Character Style for main entries +Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry. +Alphabetical delimiter +Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings. +Key separated by commas +Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ae8959f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (illustration index) +/text/swriter/01/04120223.xhp + + + +Entries (illustration index) +Specify the format for the illustration index entries. + +
+ +
+ +Illustration Indexes only have one index level. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f96d1b8ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (index of tables) +/text/swriter/01/04120224.xhp + + + +Entries (index of tables) +Specify the format for the entries in an Index of Tables. + +
+ +
+ +An Index of Tables only has one index level. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb1e24102 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (user-defined index) +/text/swriter/01/04120225.xhp + + + +Entries (user-defined index) +Specify the format for the entries in a user-defined index. + +
+ +
+ +User-defined indexes do not support sub-keys. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e632780e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (table of objects) +/text/swriter/01/04120226.xhp + + + +Entries (table of objects) +Specify the format for the entries in a Table of Objects. + +
+ +
+ +A Table of Objects only has one index level. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1019e73bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Entries (bibliography) +/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp + + + +Entries (bibliography) +Specify the format for bibliography entries. + +
+ +
+Type +The types that are displayed depend on the different literature sources. + + +Type +Lists the available bibliography entries. To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert. Use the Define Bibliography Entry dialog to add new entries. +Insert +Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button. +Remove +Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line. + +Sort by +Specify the sorting options for the bibliography entries. +Document position +Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document. Select this option if you want to use automatically numbered references. +Content +Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication. +Sort keys + + +1, 2 or 3 +Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area. + + +AZ +Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order. + + +ZA +Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b44fb66e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Define Bibliography Entry + /text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp + + + + + +Define Bibliography Entry + Change the content of a bibliography entry. +
+ +
+ Entry data + Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. + +Short name + Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. + +Type + Select the source for the bibliography entry. + + Formatting bibliography entries + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ba60bb2b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Concordance File + /text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp + + + + + + + editing; concordance files + concordance files; definition + + + + + +

Edit Concordance File

+Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index. A concordance file lists words that should be referenced in an alphabetical index, together with the page number(s) where they appear in the document. +You can use the Find All button on the Find & Replace dialog to highlight all places where a word appears, then open the Insert Index Entry dialog to add that word and places to the alphabetical index. However, if you need the same set of alphabetical indexes in multiple documents, the concordance file allows you to enter every word just once, then use the list many times.i61650 + +The default filter for creating or opening concordance files is *.sdi. However, the file format of the concordance file is plain text. + +

To access the Edit Concordance File dialog:

+ + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography - Type. + + + In the Type box, select "Alphabetical Index". + + + In the Options area, select the Concordance file check box. + + + Click the File button, and then choose New or Edit. + + +A concordance file contains the following fields: + + + + Term + + + Meaning + + + + + Search term + + + "Search term" refers to the index entry that you want to mark in the document. + + + + + Alternative entry + + + "Alternative entry" refers to the index entry that you want to appear in the index. + + + + + 1st and 2nd Keys + + + The 1st and 2nd Keys are parent index entries. The "Search term" or the "Alternative entry" appears as a subentry under the 1st and 2nd Keys. + + + + + Comment + + + Add a comment line above the entry. Commented lines start with #. + + + + + Match case + + + "Match case" means that uppercase and lowercase letters are considered. + + + + + Word only + + + "Word only" searches for the term as a single word. + + +
+ +To enable the "Match case" or "Word only" options, click in the corresponding cell, and then select the check box. + +

To create a concordance file without the Edit Concordance File dialog:

+Use the following format guidelines when you create a concordance file: + + + + Each entry in the concordance file is on a separate line. + + + Commented lines start with #. + + + Use the following format for the entries: + + Search term;Alternative entry;1st key;2nd key;Match case;Word only +The entries "Match case" and "Word only" are interpreted as "No" or FALSE if they are empty or zero (0). All other contents are interpreted as "Yes" or TRUE. + +

Example

+For example, to include the word "Boston" in your alphabetical index under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line in the concordance file: +Boston;Boston;Cities;;0;0 UFI: translate this with same name as in par_id3155907. Pay attention to the following paras also +This also finds "Boston" if it is written in lowercase letters. +To include the "Beacon Hill" district in Boston under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line: +Beacon Hill;Boston;Cities; + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f2c532a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Bibliography Entry +/text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp + + + + + +Insert Bibliography Entry +Inserts a bibliography reference. + +
+ +
+Entry +From bibliography database +Inserts a reference from the bibliography database. +From document content +Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document. An entry that is stored in the document has priority over an entry that is stored in the bibliography database. +
+When you save a document that contains bibliography entries, the corresponding records are automatically saved in a hidden field in the document. +
+ +Short name +Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert. +Author, Title +If available, the author and the full title of the selected short name are displayed in this area. +Insert +Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document. +Close +Closes the dialog. +New +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database. +Edit +Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record. + +Tips for working with bibliography entries + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30c23bbd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Frame +/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp + + + + +
+

Frame

+Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects. +
+
+ +
+To edit a frame, click the border to select it, and then choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. You can also resize or move a selected frame using special shortcut keys. +To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete. +If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through the remaining text. +In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by a red rectangle. +You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn in red, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame. + + + + + + + + + + +

Icon on the Insert toolbar:

+Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bd239e77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Resizing and Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard +/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp + + + +moving;objects and frames +objects;moving and resizing with keyboard +resizing;objects and frames, by keyboard +MW changed "objects;"Resizing and Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard +You can resize and move selected frames and objects with the keyboard. +To move a selected frame or object, press an arrow key. To move by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. +To resize a selected frame or object, first press CommandCtrl+Tab. Now one of the handles blinks to show that it is selected. To select another handle, press CommandCtrl+Tab again. Press an arrow key to resize the object by one grid unit. To resize by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. +The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d26d5e4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Insert Table +/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Insert Table

+Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. + +
+
+ +
+ + +To insert a table from another document, copy the table, and then paste the table into the current document. + + +To convert text into a table, select the text, and then choose Table - Convert - Text to Table. + + +To insert a table into a table, click in a cell in the table and choose Table - Insert Table. + + +$[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area. + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the table. + +Columns +Enter the number of columns that you want in the table. + +Rows +Enter the number of rows that you want in the table. +Options +Set the options for the table. + +Heading +Includes a heading row in the table. + +Repeat heading rows on new pages +Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page. + +

Heading rows

+Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading. The spinbox accepts values up to one less than the number of rows being inserted. + +

Don't split the table over pages

+Prevents the table from spanning more than one page. + +List of table styles +Select a predefined style for the new table. +Icon on the Insert toolbar +On the Insert toolbar, click the Table icon to open the Insert Table dialog, where you can insert a table in the current document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell. + +
+ + + +Table - Properties - Text Flow +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57c340300 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Exchange Database + /text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + databases; exchanging + address books; exchanging + exchanging databases + replacing;databases + + + + + + +Exchange Database +Change the data sources for the current document. To correctly display the contents of inserted fields, the replacement database must contain identical field names. +
+ +
+ +
+For example, if you inserting address fields in a form letter from an address database, you can then exchange the database with another address database to insert different addresses. + +Exchange Databases +You can only change one database at a time in this dialog. + + +Databases in Use +Lists the databases that are currently in use. The current document contains at least one data field from each of the databases in the list. + + +Available Databases +Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +Browse +Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list. + + +Define +Replaces the current data source with the data source that you selected in the Available Databases list. + +To exchange a database: +Ensure that both databases contain matching field names and field types. + + + + Click in the document that you want to change the data source for. + + + Choose Edit - Exchange Database. + + + In the Databases in Use list, select the database table that you want to replace. + + + In the Available Databases list, select the replacement database table. + + + Click Define. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88e6e05ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Insert (Text from File) + /text/swriter/01/04190000.xhp + + + + + + + +Insert (Text from File) +Inserts the contents of another document into the current document at the cursor position. + +
+ +
+To always have the latest version of the contents of a file, insert a section into your document, and then insert a link to the text file in the section. See insert a section for details. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f1c00beb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Script + /text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp + + + + + + +

Insert Script

+ Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document. + +
+ +
+ An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. + If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. + +Jump to Previous Script. + + +Jump to Next Script. + + Contents + +

Script Type

+ Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. + + +

URL

+ Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the Browse button, locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: + <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> + /* ignore all text here */ + </SCRIPT> + +Browse + Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + + +

Text

+ Enter the script code that you want to insert. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6cd4997f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Header + /text/swriter/01/04220000.xhp + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+The headers are visible only when you view the document in print layout (enable View - Normal). +A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have headers. +To remove a header, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and then select the page style containing the header. The header is removed from all of the pages that use this page style. +To add or remove headers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header - All. +To format a header, choose Format - Page - Header. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6da40fa30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Footer + /text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp + + + + + + + + +
+ +
+The footers are visible only when you view the document in print layout (enable View - Normal). +A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have footers. +To remove a footer, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and then select the page style containing the footer. The footer is removed from all of the pages that use this page style. +To add or remove footers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer - All. +To format a footer, choose Format - Page - Footer. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3eb332d2e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Fields (submenu) + /text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Field

+The submenu lists the most common field types that can be inserted into a document at the current cursor position. To view all of the available fields, choose More Fields. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +

More Fields

+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a47ba415 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Flow +/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp + + + +
+text flow;at breaks +paragraphs;keeping together at breaks +protecting;text flow +widows +orphans +block protect, see also widows or orphans +mw added two index entries + + +Text Flow +Specify hyphenation and pagination options. +
+
+ +
+Hyphenation +Specify the hyphenation options for text documents. + +Automatically +Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. + +Don't hyphenate words in CAPS +Don't insert hyphens in words written entirely in capital letters. + +Don't hyphenate the last word +Don't insert hyphens in the last word of paragraphs. + +Characters at line end +Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted. + +Characters at line begin +Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen. + +Maximum consecutive hyphenated lines +Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. + +Minimum word length in characters +Enter the minimum word length in characters that can be hyphenated. + +Hyphenation zone +To reduce hyphenation, enter the length of the hyphenation zone. Instead of the possible hyphenation, the line will break between words, if the remaining horizontal space does not exceed the hyphenation zone. Hyphenation zone results in enlarged spaces between words in justified text, and greater distance from paragraph margins in non-justified text. + +Breaks +Specify the page or column break options. + +InsertUFI: #i30777# +Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use. + +Type +Select the break type that you want to insert. + +Position +Select where you want to insert the break. + +With Page Style +Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break. + +Page Style +Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break. + +Page number +Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. +Options +Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break. + +Do not split paragraph +Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted. + +Keep with next paragraph +Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted. + + +Orphan control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the paragraph is shifted to the next page. + + +Widow control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. + + + +Orphans. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab7106324 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drop Caps +/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+first letters as large capital letters +capital letters;starting paragraphs +drop caps insertion + + + +Drop Caps +Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box. +
+
+ +
+Settings + +Display drop caps +Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph. + +Whole word +Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type. + +Number of characters +Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps. + +Lines +Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines. + +Space to text +Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. +Contents + +Text +Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph. + +Character Style +Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..802430d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Outline & List + /text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Outline & List

+ Adds or removes outline level, list style, and line numbering from the paragraph or paragraph style. You can also restart or modify the start number for numbered lists and line numbering. +
+
+ +
+ + + To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose View - Styles, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. + + + To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. + + + + +

Outline

+

Outline level

+ Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style. Select Text Body to reset the outline level. +

Apply List Style

+ +

List Style

+ Select the List Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Styles window (Command+TF11) if you click the List Styles icon. + + +

Edit Style

+ Edit the properties of the selected list style. These properties will apply to all paragraphs formatted with the given list style. + This button is disabled when Chapter Numbering is applied. Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering to edit the outline level and numbering format. +Outline level and List style are independent of each other. Use Tools - Chapter Numbering to assign a numbering format to paragraph styles used as headings in a document outline structure. + This section only appears when you edit the properties of the current paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph. + +

Restart numbering at this paragraph

+ Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph. + +

Start with

+ Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. + + +

"Start with" spin button

+ Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphs are numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here. +

Line numbering

+ Specify the Line numbering options. To add line numbers to your document, choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + +

Include this paragraph in line numbering

+ Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering. + + +

Restart at this paragraph

+ Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter. + + +

Start with

+ Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering + +The following buttons appear only for Paragraph Style. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1cc41955 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Page Style +/text/swriter/01/05040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Page Style

+Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d13d99dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + Columns + /text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp + + + +
+ + + +added two Help IDs, see i97180 +

Columns

+ Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section. + +
+
+ +
+ You can select from predefined column layouts, or create your own. When you apply a layout to a page style, all pages that use the style are updated. Similarly, when you apply a column layout to a frame style, all frames that use that style are updated. You can also change the column layout for a single frame. +

Settings

+ + +

Columns

+ Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section. +

Selection fields

+ You can also select one of the predefined column layouts. + Tooltips describe each predefined selection. + +

Apply to

+ Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to. This option is only available if you access this dialog by choosing Format - Columns. +The following two options are only available when formatting sections. +

Evenly distribute contents to all columns

+ + Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically. Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections. + + + The column layout preview only shows the columns and not the surrounding page. +

Width and spacing

+

AutoWidth

+ Creates columns of equal width. + If the AutoWidth check box is not selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns. +

Column

+ Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns. + +

Left Arrow

+ Moves the column display one column to the left. + + + + +Left Arrow Icon + + + Left Arrow + + +
+ +

Right Arrow

+ Moves the column display one column to the right. + + + + +Right Arrow Icon + + + Right Arrow + + +
+ + + +

Width

+ Enter the width of the column. + + +

Spacing

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns. + +

Separator line

+ This area is only available if your layout contains more than one column. + +

Style

+ Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". +

Width

+Enter width of the separator line. +

Color

+Select a color for the separator line. + +

Height

+ Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area. + +

Position

+ Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32db94ea2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/05040501.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Options

+Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for the section. +
+ +
+Sections follow the text flow behavior of the page they are inserted into. +For example, if you insert a section that uses a two-column layout into a page style that uses a four-column layout, the two-column layout is nested inside one of the four columns. +You can also nest sections, that is, you can insert a section into another section. + +UFI: changed embedded links, see #i64128 + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fbb206ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Footnote + /text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp + + + +
+ + +Footnote + Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document. +
+
+ +
+Footnote area + Set the height of the footnote area. + + +Not larger than page area + Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes. + + +Maximum footnote height + Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height. + + + Enter the maximum height for the footnote area. + + +Space to text + Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area. + + Separator Line + Specifies the position and other properties of the separator line. + +Position + Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area. + + +Style + Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". + + +Thickness + Select the thickness of the separator line. + + +Color + Select the color of the separator line. + + + +Length + Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area. + + +Spacing to footnote contents + Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area. + To specify the spacing between two footnotes, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Indents & Spacing tab. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..492bab2af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + +Footnotes/Endnotes +/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Footnotes/Endnotes

+ Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats. +
+
+ +
+

Footnotes

+ Collect at end of text + Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear. + Restart numbering + Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify. + Start at + Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote. + Custom format + Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes. This check box is only available if the Restart numbering check box is selected. + Before + Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number. + Spin button own format + Select the numbering scheme for the footnotes. + After + Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number. +

Endnotes

+ Collect at end of section + Adds endnotes at the end of the section. + Restart numbering + Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify. + Start at + Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote. + Custom format + Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes. This check box is only available if you the Restart numbering check box is selected. + Before + Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number + Spin button own format + Select the numbering scheme for the endnotes. + After + Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e83d47f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Grid +/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp + + + +
+ + +text grid for Asian layout + +Text Grid +Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +Grid +Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style. +Grid layout + +Lines per page +Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page. + +Characters per line +Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line. + +Max. base text size +Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line. + +Max. Ruby text size +Enter the font size for the Ruby text. + +Ruby text below/left from base text +Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text. + + + +Grid display +Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8cf380da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Image +/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Image

+Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected image. + +You can also change some of the properties of the selected image with shortcut keys. +
+ +
+The Image dialog contains the following tab pages: + + +

Wrap

+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..098d2c9ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ + + + + + + + Position and Size + /text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp + + + + +
+ resizing;aspect ratio + aspect ratio;resizing objects + UFI: new index entries, see i54237 + + +

Position and Size

+ Specifies the size and the position of the selected image, frame, or OLE object on a page. +
+
+ +
+ +

Size

+ +

Width

+ Enter the width that you want for the selected object. + +

Relative

+ Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area. + +

Relative width relation

+ Decides what 100% width means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). + +

Height

+ Enter the height that you want for the selected object. + +

Relative

+ Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area. + +

Relative height relation

+ Decides what 100% height means: either text area (excluding margins) or the entire page (including margins). + +

Keep ratio

+ Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting. + +

Original Size

+ Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. + This option is not available for frames. + + +

Automatic

+ Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. + The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. + +
+

Anchor

+ Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. The anchor options are not available when you open the dialog from the Styles window. + +

To page

+ Anchors the selection to the current page. + +

To paragraph

+ Anchors the selection to the current paragraph. + +

To character

+ Anchors the selection to a character. + +

As character

+ Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. +
+ +
+

Position

+ Specify the location of the selected object on the current page. + +

Horizontal

+ Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character". + +

by

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box. + +

to

+ Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. The following options are available: + + + Paragraph area: the object is positioned considering the whole width available for the paragraph, including indent spaces. + + + Paragraph text area: the object is positioned considering the whole width available for text in the paragraph, excluding indent spaces. + + + Left of paragraph text area: the object is positioned in the region from the left text boundary to the first character on the left edge of the anchored paragraph text. For multicolumn paragraphs, the region is defined in relation to the column where the anchor is located. When the anchor is not located in the first column, then the region starts at the left column margin. + + + Right of paragraph text area: the object is positioned in the region from the last character on the right edge of anchored paragraph text to the right text boundary. When the anchor is not located in the last column then the region ends at the right column margin. + + + Left of page text area: the object is positioned in the region between the left edge of the page and the left margin plus any left page padding. + + + Right of page text area: the object is positioned in the region between the right edge of the page and the right margin plus any right page padding. + + + Entire page: the object is positioned considering the whole width of the page, from the left to the right page borders. + + + Page text area: the object is positioned considering the whole width available for text in the page, from the left to the right page margins. + + + Character: the object is positioned considering the horizontal space used by the character. + + +
+ Beware that the set of options available depend on the Anchor settings. Therefore, not all options listed above may be shown due to the current Anchor choice. +
+
+ You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box. +
+ +

Mirror on even pages

+ Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. +
+ You can also use the Image flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and odd pages. + +
+ +

Vertical

+ Select the vertical alignment option for the object. The selection specifies the position of the object relative to the region or reference line selected in the to dropdown list. + + +

by

+ Enter the amount of space to leave from the top edge of the object to the region or reference line selected in the to dropdown list. This option is active only when the following combinations of Vertical and Anchor are selected. For these combinations, you can specify the amount of space to leave from: + + + + + Vertical + + + with Anchor + + + + + From top + + + Top edge of selected region.
Positive values move the object down, negative values up. + + + To page, To paragraph, To character or To frame + + + + + From bottom + + + Selected reference line.
Positive values move the object up, negative values down. + + + To character or As character + + +
+ + +

to

+ Select the region or reference line for the vertical alignment. The object can be positioned in relation to the following regions or reference lines: + + + Margin: Depending on the anchoring type, the object is positioned considering the space between the top margin and the character ("To character" anchoring) or bottom edge of the paragraph ("To paragraph" anchoring) where the anchor is placed. + + + Paragraph text area: the object is positioned considering the height of the paragraph where the anchor is placed. + + + Entire page: the object is positioned considering the full page height, from top to bottom page borders. + + + Page text area: the object is positioned considering the full height available for text, from top to bottom margins. + + +
+
+ + + Character: available only for "To character" or "As character" anchoring, the object is positioned relative to the region between the top border and bottom border of the character immediately before where the anchor is placed. A character formatted with a common border with other characters or objects uses the region for the highest character or object in the common border. + + + Line of text: available only for "To character" anchoring, the object is positioned considering the height of the line of text where the anchor is placed. + + + Baseline: available only for "As character" anchoring, this option will position the object considering the text baseline over which all characters are placed. + + + Row: available only for "As character" anchoring, this option will position the object considering the height of the row where the anchor is placed. + + + Entire frame: available only for "To frame" anchoring, the outer edges of the frame. + + + Frame text area: available only for "To frame" anchoring, the text area of the frame. + + + + +If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center" alignment options are available. +
+ +
+

Keep inside text boundaries

+ Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option. + By default, the Keep inside text boundaries option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of Writer older than OpenOffice.org 2.0. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). +
+ + + The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. If you anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line. + + Format - Anchor + Format - Align Text + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..212fd2412 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + + + + + + + + +Wrap +/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + + +Wrap +Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and the object. + +
+
+ +
+To wrap text around a table, place the table in a frame, and then wrap the text around the frame. +Settings + + +None +Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object. + + + + + +Icon + + + +None + + +
+ + + +Before +Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space. + + + + +Icon + + + +Before + + +
+ + + +After +Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space. + + + + +Icon + + + +After + + +
+ + + +Parallel +Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Parallel + + +
+ + + +Through +Places the object in front of the text. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Through + + +
+ + + +Optimal +Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped. + + + + + +Icon + + + +Optimal + + +
+ +Options +Specify the text wrap options. + + +First Paragraph +Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter. The space between the paragraphs is determined by the size of the object. + + + +In Background +Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type. + + + +Contour +Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames. To change the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. + + +Outside only +Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape. This option is not available for frames. +Allow overlap +Specifies whether the object is allowed to overlap another object. This option has no effect on wrap through objects, which can always overlap. +Gaps +Specify the amount of space to leave between the selected object and the text. + +Left +Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text. + +Right +Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text. + +Top +Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text. + +Bottom +Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd512353b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ + + + + + + + + +Contour Editor +/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Contour Editor +Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object. + + +Displays a preview of the contour.and this bubble text hides both from view if not set to 0 length +
+ +
+ +Apply +Applies the contour to the selected object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Apply + + +
+ + +Workspace +Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area. + + + + +Icon + + + +Workspace + + +
+ + +Select +Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour. + + + + +Icon + + + +Select + + +
+ + +Rectangle +Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rectangle + + +
+ + +Ellipse +Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag. + + + + +Icon + + + +Ellipse + + +
+ + +Polygon +Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon + + +
+ + +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour. + + + + +Icon + + + +Edit Points + + +
+ + +Move Points +Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour. + + + + +Icon + + + +Move Points + + +
+ + +Insert Points +Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Points + + +
+ + +Delete Points +Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete. + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete Points + + +
+ + +Auto Contour +Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit. + + + + +Icon + + + +AutoContour + + +
+ + +Undo +Reverses the last action. + + + + +Icon + + + +Undo + + +
+ + +Redo +Reverses the action of the last Undo command. + + + + +Icon + + + +Redo + + +
+ + +Color Replacer +Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box. + + + + +Icon + + + +Color Replacer + + +
+ + +Tolerance +Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c75739c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Image +/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Image +Specify the flip and the link options for the selected image. +
+
+ +
+Flip + + +Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT +Flips the selected image vertically. + + + +Horizontally +Flips the selected image horizontally. + + +On all pages +Flips the selected image horizontally on all pages. + +On left pages +Flips the selected image horizontally only on even pages. + +On right pages +Flips the selected image horizontally only on odd pages. + +Link +Inserts the image as a link. + +File name +Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the Browse button and then locate the file that you want to link to. + +Browse +Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. + +Format - Flip +Edit - Links + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d5731518 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ + + + + + + + + +Macro +/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Macro +Specifies the macro to run when you click an image, frame, or an OLE object. +
+
+ +
+ +Event +Lists the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to the selected object are listed. +The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro: + + + +Event + + +Event trigger + + +OLE object + + +Image + + +Frame + + +AutoText + + +ImageMap area + + +Hyperlink + + + + +Click object + + +object is selected + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Mouse over object + + +mouse pointer moves over the object + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +Trigger Hyperlink + + +hyperlink that is assigned to the object is clicked + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + + + +✓ + + + + +Mouse leaves object + + +mouse pointer moves off the object + + +✓ + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +✓ + + +✓ + + + + +Image loaded successfully + + +image is loaded successfully + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Image loading terminated + + +loading of the image is terminated by the user (for example, when downloading) + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Could not load image + + +image is not successfully loaded + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Input of alpha characters + + +text is inputted + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Input of non-alpha characters + + +Nonprinting characters, such as tabs and line breaks, are entered + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Resize frame + + +frame is resized + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Move frame + + +frame is moved + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + + + +Before inserting AutoText + + +before AutoText is inserted + + + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + + + +After inserting AutoText + + +after AutoText is inserted + + + + + + + + +✓ + + + + + + +
+ +For events that are linked to controls in forms, see Control properties or Form properties. +Assigned Action +Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs. +Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by $[officename] Writer or by the function. See the $[officename] Basic Help for more information. + +Macro From +Lists the $[officename] program and any open $[officename] document. Within this list, select the location where you want to pick the macro from. + +Existing Macros +Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign. + +Assign +Assigns the selected macro to the selected event. + +Remove +Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5f45cbe4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hyperlink + /text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ Link to + Set the link properties. + +URL + Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. + +Browse + Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. + +Name + Enter a name for the hyperlink. + +Frame + Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. + Image Map + Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. + +Server-side image map + Uses a server-side image map. + +Client-side image map + Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. + + URL + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8468c711f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Options

+Specify properties for the selected image, frame or OLE object. +
+
+ +
+

Accessibility

+ +

Name

+Enter a name for the selected item. +Assign an object, graphic or frame a meaningful name, so that you can quickly locate it afterwards in long documents. + + +

Text Alternative (images and OLE objects only)

+ + +

Sequences (frames only)

+ +

Previous link

+Displays the frame that comes before the selected frame in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the selected frame and the target frame must be empty. + +

Next link

+Displays the frame that comes after the selected frame in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty. +

Protect

+Specifies protection options for the selected item. + +

Contents

+Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item. +You can still copy the contents of the selected item. + +

Position

+Locks the position of the selected item in the current document. + +

Size

+Locks the size of the selected item. +

Content alignment (frames only)

+

Vertical alignment

+Specifies the vertical alignment of the frame's content. Mainly it means text content, but it also affects tables and other objects anchored to the text area (anchored as character, to character or to paragraph), for example frames, graphics or drawings. +

Properties

+Specifies print and text options for the selected item. + +

Editable in read-only document (frames only)

+Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected). + +

Print

+Includes the selected item when you print the document. + +

Text direction (frames only)

+Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list. + + + +Text direction. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1db1114d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Object +/text/swriter/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Name is not related to UI, dialog is called by Format - Image or Format - Frame, so name should be Frame / Image or we need two files that are the same except for title +

Object

+Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name. + +
+ +
+ + +

Wrap

+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..189e3d4fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Table Properties +/text/swriter/01/05090000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Table Properties

+Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + +

+Background

+Set or remove color or image background for selected cells, rows, or table. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82df530e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + +Table +/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; positioning +tables; inserting text before + + +UFI: deleted "tables;sizing" +

Table

+Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table. +
+
+ +
+Properties + +Name +Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator. + +Width +Enter the width of the table. This check box is only available if the Automatic option in the Alignment area is not selected. + +Relative +Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width. +Alignment +Set the alignment options for the selected table. + +Automatic +Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins. This is the recommended setting for tables in HTML documents. + +Left +Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin. + +Left margin +Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area. + +Right +Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin. + +Centered +Centers the table horizontally on the page. + +Manual +Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area. $[officename] automatically calculates the table width. Select this option if you want to specify the individual column widths. +Spacing + +Left +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Left option is selected in the Alignment area. + +Right +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Right option is selected in the Alignment area. + +Above +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table. + +Below +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table. +To insert a paragraph before a table at the beginning of a document, header or footer, place the cursor before any content in the first cell, and then press OptionAlt+Enter. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..431d16f30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Columns +/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Columns +Specify the column width properties. +
+
+ +
+ +Adapt table width +Reduces or increases table width with modified column width. This option is not available if Automatic alignment or Relative width is selected on the Table tab, or if any table rows have been selected. + +Adjust columns proportionally +Change all the other column widths by the same percentage as the one being changed. For example, if you reduce by half the size of a column, the sizes of all the other columns will be halved. This option requires that Adapt table width can be enabled. + +Remaining space +Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab. +Column width +Specify the column widths for the table. + + + + + + +Column widths +Enter the width that you want for the column. + +Left Arrow +Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column. + +Right Arrow +Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..084911d0d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Tables Using the Keyboard +/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tables; editing with the keyboard + +Editing Tables Using the Keyboard + +You can resize and delete table columns with the keyboard. +Resizing Columns and Rows + + +To resize a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down Alt, and then press the left or the right arrow. To resize the column without changing the width of the table, hold down Command+OptionCtrl+Alt, and then press the left or the right arrows. + + +To increase the left indent of the table, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the right arrow. + + +To resize a row, place the cursor in the row, hold down OptionAlt, and then press the up or the down arrows. + + +To move the table downwards on the page, hold down OptionAlt+Shift, and then press the down arrow. + + +Inserting and deleting columns or rows + + +To insert a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. + + +To delete a column, place the cursor in the column that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the left or the right arrow. + + +To insert a row, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down OptionAlt and press Insert, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. + + +To delete a row, place the cursor in the row that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. + + +To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. + +Table Bar + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e7c34ddab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Flow +/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables;text flow around text tables +text flow;around text tables +columns; breaks in text tables +row breaks in text tables +tables; allowing page breaks +page breaks; tables +splitting tables;row breaks + + + +Text Flow +Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table. +
+
+ +
+Text flow + +Break +Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table. + +Page +Inserts a page break before or after the table. + +Column +Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page. + +Before +Inserts a page or column break before the table. + +After +Inserts a page or column break after the table. + +With Page Style +Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break. + +Page Style +Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break. + +Page number +Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. If you want to continue the current page numbering, leave the checkbox unchecked. + +Allow table to split across pages and columns +Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table. + + +Allow row to break across pages and columns +Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. + +Keep with next paragraph +Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break. + +Repeat heading +Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page. + +The first ... rows +Enter the number of rows to include in the heading. + +Text orientation +Select the orientation for the text in the cells. You can use the following formatting options to specify the orientation of text in table cells: + + +Horizontal + + +Vertical (top to bottom) + + +Use superordinate object settings + + +Vertical (bottom to top) + + + +Vertical alignment +Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..429259e12 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cell +/text/swriter/01/05100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Cell +This command is only available if you have selected a table in your document, or if the cursor is in a table cell. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16ad0563c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Protect + /text/swriter/01/05100300.xhp + + + +
+ +

Protect

+
+ Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified. +
+
+
+ +
+ When the cursor is in a read-only cell, a note appears on the Status Bar. + To remove cell protection, select the cell(s), right-click, and then choose Cell - Unprotect. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..987f60a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Unprotect + /text/swriter/01/05100400.xhp + + + +
+ +

Unprotect

+
+ Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table. +
+
+
+ +
+ To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press Command +Ctrl+Shift+T. To remove the protection from all of the tables in a document, click anywhere in the document, and then press Command +Ctrl+Shift+T. + You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8cf8a71e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row +/text/swriter/01/05110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Row +Set the height of rows, or select, insert, and delete rows. +
+ +
+Height + +Optimal Height + + + +Insert... + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95e181034 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Row Height +/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Row Height +Changes the height of the selected row(s). + +
+ +
+ +Height +Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s). + +Fit to size +Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells. +You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Row - Optimal Height. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da7745128 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Optimal Height +/text/swriter/01/05110200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + +Optimal Height + Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells. This is the default setting for new tables. +
+ +
+ This option is only available if the table contains a row with a fixed height. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a47847695 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select +/text/swriter/01/05110300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Select + Selects the row that contains the cursor. +
+
+ +
+ This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f46d86b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/swriter/01/05110500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Delete +Deletes the selected row(s) from the table. + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea4e808cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column +/text/swriter/01/05120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Column +Set the width of columns, or select, insert, and delete columns. +
+ +
+Width... + +Optimal width + + + +Insert... + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38b7f1dba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column Width +/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Column Width +Changes the width of the selected column(s). + +
+ +
+Width + +Columns +Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of. + +Width +Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).removed 2 sentences, see #i64155 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47b2b784a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Optimal Width +/text/swriter/01/05120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Optimal Width +Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells. Changing the width of a column does not affect the width of the other columns in the table. The width of the table cannot exceed the page width. + +The change affects only selected cells. You can adjust multiple cells next to each other if you select the cells together. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..180db97cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select +/text/swriter/01/05120300.xhp + + + +
+Select + Selects the column that contains the cursor. This option is only available if the cursor is in a table. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c7b8955c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Columns/Rows +/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Inserts a row into the table. + +Inserts a column into the table. +Insert Columns/Rows +Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table. + +
+ +
+ + +Insert +Number +Enter the number of columns or rows that you want. +Position +Specifies where to insert the columns or rows. + +Before +Adds new columns to the left of the current column, or adds new rows above the current row. + +After +Adds new columns to the right of the current column, or adds new rows below the current row. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c02e36509 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete +/text/swriter/01/05120500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Delete +Deletes the selected column(s) from the table. + +
+This command is only available if the cursor is in a table. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c29583155 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + +Styles in Writer +/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +styles;categories +character styles;style categories +paragraph styles;style categories +frames; styles +page styles;style categories +list styles;style categories + +

Styles in Writer

+
+UFI: this is no more "Style Catalog" dialog, but we need the links and tablesUFI: another comment: the Style Catalog can be customized to be visible again!!! Dont know it this is temporary bug, workaround, or feature +The following information concerns Writer styles that you can apply using the Styles deck of the Sidebar. +
+If you want, you can edit the styles of the current document, and then save the document as a template. To save the document as template, choose File - Templates - Save as Template. + +

Style Category

+These are the different categories of formatting styles. + + + +Name + + +Description + + + + +Character Styles + + +Use Character Styles to format single characters, or entire words and phrases. If you want, you can nest Character Styles. + + + + +Paragraph Styles + + +Use Paragraph Styles to format paragraphs, including the font type and size. You can also select the paragraph style to apply to the next paragraph. + + + + +Frame Styles + + +Use Frame Styles to format text and graphic frames. + + + + +Page Styles + + +Use Page Styles to organize the structure of the document, and to add page numbers. You can also specify the page style to apply to the first page that follows after a page break. + + + + +List Styles + + +Use List Styles to format ordered or unordered lists. + + +
+ +
+

Style Groups

+These are the style groups that you can display in the Styles window. + + + +Name + + +Meaning + + + + +Automatic + + +Displays styles appropriate to the current context. + + + + +All Styles + + +Displays all styles of the active style category. + + + + +Applied Styles + + +Displays the styles (of selected category) applied in the current document. + + + + +Custom Styles + + +Displays all user-defined styles in the selected style category. + + + + +Character Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for text. + + + + +Chapter Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for headings. + + + + +List Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for ordered or unordered lists. + + + + +Index Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for indexes. + + + + +Special Styles + + +Displays formatting styles for headers, footers, footnotes, endnotes, tables, and captions. + + + + +HTML Styles + + +Displays a list of styles for HTML documents. + + + + +Conditional Styles + + +Displays the user-defined conditional styles. + + + + +Hierarchical + + +Displays the styles in the selected category in a hierarchical list. To view the styles in a sublevel, click on the plus sign (+) next to the sublevel name. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a8555cb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + +Character Style +/text/swriter/01/05130002.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Character Style

+Character styles provide a way to customize the formatting for individual characters. Use character styles to change the properties of a character, word or selected part of a paragraph. When you apply a character style to a text selection, the character style properties override the corresponding paragraph character properties. +For example, if you apply a character style with 15pt font size to a selection in a paragraph with character property of 12pt font size, the selection is set to 15pt, while the rest of the paragraph remains with 12pt font size. +No Character Style is actually the set of character properties of the current paragraph style. Choose No Character Style to reset the character properties of the selection to those of the paragraph style. You cannot customize No Character Style. +
+ +
+Direct formatting overrides any formatting provided by a character style. To remove direct formatting from a selection, use Format - Clear Direct Formatting (CommandCtrl+M). + +Use the Contains section in the Organizer to see the properties of the character style. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..16ae38f4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +List Style +/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

List Style

+Here you can create a List Style. The List Styles are organized in the Styles window. +
+ +
+When a List Style is created, a name is assigned to the style. The list style can be applied to paragraphs or assigned to a paragraph style in the Apply List Style section of the Outline & List tab. +Ordered lists and unordered lists created in the Bullets and Numbering dialog or with the Toggle Ordered List and Toggle Unordered List icons of the Formatting bar use direct formatting. They are not list styles. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..158011486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + +Condition +/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp + + + +
+styles; conditional +conditional styles + + + +

Condition

+Define conditions for conditional styles here. +
+
+ +
+Conditional styles are paragraph styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, you cannot change the conditional properties of a conditional style. +$[officename] applies the paragraph properties of conditional styles as follows (the bold terms correspond to the titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional style is in a Context that has an Applied Style linked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no style is linked to the Context, then the attributes defined in the conditional style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship: + + +Open a blank text document and write a short business letter with a header (Format - Page - Header). + + +Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New in the Styles window, and selecting all the paragraph properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this style "Business letter". + + +Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as a conditional style. + + +In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. + + +You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Apply. + + +Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "Business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display All Styles or Custom Styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) + + +The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style. +The "Text Body" Style was created as a conditional style. Therefore, any styles you derive from it can be used as conditional styles. +The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, HTML, and so on). + +

Conditional style

+Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style. + +

Context

+Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, list levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. +

Applied Styles

+Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context. + +

Paragraph Styles

+A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box. + + +

Remove

+Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style. + +

Assign

+Click Apply to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b3f6173c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ + + + + + + + Styles (Sidebar) + /text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Styles window;applying styles + styles;previews + previews;styles + +mw deleted "applying;." + + +

Styles (Sidebar)

+Use the Styles deck of the Sidebar to apply, create, edit, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply the style. + +Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style. +
+ +
+ +
+To dock the Styles window, drag its title bar to the left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the window, double-click a free space on its toolbar. +By default, the Styles deck displays a preview of the available styles. The previews can be disabled by unchecking the Show Previews box below the list of styles. + + +

Style Category

+ + + + + + Icon Paragraph Styles + + + Paragraph Styles + Displays formatting styles for paragraphs. Use paragraph styles to apply the same formatting, such as font, numbering, and layout to the paragraphs in your document. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Character Styles + + + Character Styles + Displays formatting styles for characters. Use character styles to apply font styles to selected text in a paragraph. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Frame Styles + + + Frame Styles + Displays formatting styles for frames. Use frame styles to format frame layouts and position. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Page Styles + + + Page Styles + Displays formatting styles for pages. Use page styles to determine page layouts, including the presence of headers and footers. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon List Styles + + + List Styles + Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists. Use list styles to format number and bullet characters and to specify indents. + + +
+ + + + + Icon Table Styles + + + Table Styles + Displays formatting styles for tables. Use table styles to apply borders, backgrounds, fonts, alignment, and number formats to tables. + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Fill Format Mode + + + Fill Format Mode + Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style. To exit this mode, click the icon again, or press Esc. + + +
+ + + + + Icon New Style from Selection + + + Style actions menu + Opens a submenu with more commands. + + + + + + + + New Style from Selection + Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection. + + + + + + + + Update Selected Style + The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window. + + Load Styles from Template + Opens the Load Styles from Template dialog to import styles from another document. + + +
+ +

How to apply a Character style to a selected text

+ + + Select the text. + + + Double-click the desired character style in the Styles window. + + +

How to apply a Paragraph style

+ + + Place the cursor in the paragraph, or select multiple paragraphs. + + + Double-click the desired paragraph style in the Styles window. + + +You can assign shortcut keys to Styles from the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab. Some shortcuts are predefined. + Command+0 +Ctrl+0 + (zero) applies the Text Body paragraph style. Heading 1 through Heading 5 paragraph styles can be applied by using the + Command +Ctrl + key and the heading number. For example + Command+2Ctrl+2 + applies the Heading 2 paragraph style. +The Formatting (Styles) toolbar contains icons for applying and modifying styles. +
+More information about styles. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aed08b4d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + AutoCorrect + /text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp + + + +
+AutoCorrect function;text documents + +

AutoCorrect

+ Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. +
+
+ +
+ + + +

AutoCorrect Options

+ Opens the AutoCorrect dialog. + To open the AutoFormat for Tables dialog, click in a table cell, and then choose Table - AutoFormat Styles. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddee2b297 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + +While Typing (AutoCorrect) +/text/swriter/01/05150100.xhp + + + +
+ +automatic heading formatting +AutoCorrect function;headings +headings;automatic +separator lines;AutoCorrect function + + +

While Typing

+Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options, and then click the Options tab. +
+
+ +
+You can use AutoCorrect to format text documents and plain ASCII text files, but not characters that you have manually formatted. Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document. +To reverse the last AutoCorrect action, choose Edit - Undo. +When you apply automatic formats, the following rules apply: +

AutoCorrect for Headings

+ A paragraph is formatted as a heading when the following conditions are met: + + + paragraph begins with a capital letter + + + paragraph does not end with a punctuation mark + + + empty paragraph above and below the paragraph + + +

AutoCorrect for Separator Lines

+ If you type three or more hyphens (---) or certain other characters in a row and then press Enter, the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page. The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph. The bottom padding of such a paragraph will be set to 0.75 mm. The following rules apply: + + + Three hyphens (-) yield a single line (0.05 pt thick). + + + Three underscores (_) yield a single line (0.75 pt thick). + + + Three equal signs (=) yield a thin double line (0.75 pt thick). + + + Three asterisk signs (*) yield a thick/thin double line (2.25 pt thick). + + + Three tilde signs (~) yield a thin/thick double line (2.25 pt thick). + + + Three hash signs (#) yield a medium double line (1.5 pt thick). + + +
+Other AutoCorrect rules +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..717c091fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoFormat for Tables +/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp + + + + + + +tables;AutoFormat function + styles;table styles + AutoFormat function for tables + +

AutoFormat for Tables

+ Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders. + +
+ +
+

Applying an AutoFormat to a Table

+ + + Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format. + + + Choose Table - AutoFormat Styles, and then click the format that you to want to apply. + + + Click OK. + + + +

Format

+ Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK. + +

Add

+ Adds a new table style to the list. + + + Format a table in your document. + + + Select the table, and then choose Table - AutoFormat Styles. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. + + + + + Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK. + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected table style. You cannot delete "Default Table Style". +

Rename

+ Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename "Default Table Style". +

Formatting

+ Select the formatting attributes to include in the selected table style. + +

Number format

+ Includes numbering formats in the selected table style. + +

Font

+ Includes font formatting in the selected table style. + +

Alignment

+ Includes alignment settings in the selected table style. + +

Borders

+ Includes border styles in the selected table style. + +

Pattern

+ Includes background styles in the selected table style. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46418a5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combine +/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Combine + + +Minimum Size +Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..663773071 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Apply (AutoCorrect) + /text/swriter/01/05150200.xhp + + + +
+ + +autocorrect;apply manually + +

Apply

+ Automatically formats a document or a selection according to the options set in the AutoCorrect Options tab. + To select options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, then select options in the [M] column to be applied when the Apply command is chosen. +
+
+ +
+ +

AutoCorrect for Bullets / Numbering

+ To create a bulleted list, type a hyphen (-), star (*), or plus sign (+), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. + To create a numbered list, type a number followed by a period (.), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. + Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Paragraph Style, Text Body or Text Body Indent paragraph styles. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc74ac1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Apply and Edit Changes +/text/swriter/01/05150300.xhp + + + + +
+ +Apply and Edit Changes +Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialog, you are asked to accept or reject the changes. +
+
+ +
+ +Accept All +Applies all of the formatting changes. + +Reject All +Rejects all of the formatting changes. + +Edit Changes +Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date. + +Manage Changes, Filter tab + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..014a7bb0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + +Load Styles +/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

+ + Load Master Slide + Load Master Page + Load Styles + +

+ + + Load additional slide designs for your presentation. +
+ +
+ + + Load additional page designs for your drawing. +
+ +
+ + Imports formatting styles from another document or template into the current document. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +

Categories

+ Displays the available slide design categories. +

Templates

+ Displays the templates for the selected design category. +

Preview

+ Shows or hides a preview of a selected master slide. + Some master slides may not contain visible text objects or drawing objects. + + +

Categories

+ Displays the available page design categories. +

Templates

+ Displays the pages designs for the selected design category. +

Preview

+ Shows or hides a preview of a selected page design. + Some page designs may not contain visible text objects or drawing objects. + + +

Categories

+ Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list. +

Templates

+ Lists the available templates for the selected category. +

Paragraph and Character

+ Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

Frame

+ Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

Page

+ Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

List

+ Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document. + +

Overwrite

+ Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading. No warning message is given. + Only applied styles and modified styles are loaded from a document or template. The styles shown in the sidebar cannot be used as a guide. + +

From File

+ Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open. + To save styles from a document as a template, use From File to load the styles to an empty document, then choose File - Templates - Save as Template. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f0825bb7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Split Table +/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; splitting +splitting tables; at cursor position +dividing tables + + + + +Split Table +Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position. You can also access this command by right-clicking in a table cell. +
+
+ +
+Mode + +Copy heading +Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table. + +Custom heading (apply style) +Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table. + +Custom heading +Inserts an additional blank row in the second table. + +No heading +Splits the table without copying the header row. +When you split a table that contains formulas, the formulas may be affected. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3721b92c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Merge Table +/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; merging +merging; tables + + + + +Merge Table +Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph. +
+
+ +
+If you choose this command when the cursor is in the middle of three consecutive tables, you are prompted to select the table that you want to merge with. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1eabfef90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hyphenation +/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Hyphenation +Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line. $[officename] searches the document and suggests hyphenation that you can accept or reject. If text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the selected text only. If no text is selected, the Hyphenation dialog works on the whole document. +
+
+ +
+ +To automatically hyphenate the current or selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Text Flow tab. You can also apply automatic hyphenation to a paragraph style. In text where automatic hyphenation is enabled, the Hyphenation dialog will not find any word to hyphenate. +When $[officename] finds a word that requires hyphenation, do one of the following options: + + +To accept the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Hyphenate. + + +To change the hyphenation of the displayed word, click the left or right arrow below the word, and then click Hyphenate. The left and right buttons are enabled for words with multiple hyphenation points. + + +To reject the hyphenation of the displayed word, click Skip. This word will not be hyphenated. + + + +To automatically hyphenate the remaining part of the selection or the document, click Hyphenate All and answer "Yes" to the following question. + + + +To end hyphenation, click Close. The hyphenation that is applied already will not be reverted. You can use Edit - Undo to undo all hyphenation that was applied while the Hyphenation dialog was open. + + + +To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. +To disable the Hyphenation dialog and always hyphenate automatically, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. +To manually enter a hyphen directly in the document, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command +Ctrl+Minus sign (-). +To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen directly in the document, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+CommandCtrl+Minus sign(-). +To hide soft hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. +Word + +Word +Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word. + + +Left / Right Arrow + +Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed. + +Next +Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate. + +Hyphenate +Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position. + +Remove +Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ea4b1c558 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Word Count + /text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp + + + + + + + + +
+

Word Count

+ Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document. The count is kept up to date as you type or change the selection. +
+
+ +
+ +
+ File - Properties - Statistics +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94e796d6f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Chapter Numbering + /text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp + + + + + + + + + + +

Chapter Numbering

+Specifies the numbering scheme and outline format for chapter numbering in the current document. + +
+ +
+Chapter numbering is achieved by assigning paragraph styles to outline levels, and a numbering scheme for each outline level. By default, the "Heading" paragraph styles (1-10) are assigned to the corresponding outline levels (1-10). You can use the dialog to assign a different paragraph style to an outline level. +If you want numbered headings, choose Tools - Chapter Numbering. This command opens a dialog where numbering schemes can be assigned to paragraph styles used for headings. Do not use the Toggle Ordered List icon on the Formatting Bar or the Format - Bullets and Numbering dialog. + + +
+ +

Load/Save

+Saves or loads a chapter numbering format. A saved chapter numbering format is available to load into other text documents. +The Load/Save button is only available for chapter numbering. Use List styles to save formatting for ordered or unordered lists. +
+ + + + + + + + + +

Untitled 1 - 9

+Select a predefined numbering format. Save your own predefined numbering formats using Save As. + + +

Save As

+Opens a dialog where you can save the current numbering and position settings for all levels. Saved settings are available to load into other documents. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62383d74d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + Numbering + /text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp + + + + +
+

Numbering

+ + +Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document. +
+ +
+ +
+ + +

Level

+Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for paragraph style, to all the levels, click "1-10". + +

Numbering

+Specify the formatting for the selected outline level. + + +

Paragraph Style

+Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outline level is not defined. + + +

Number

+Select the numbering scheme that you want to apply to the selected outline level. + + + + + Selection + + + Description + + + + + 1, 2, 3, ... + + + Arabic numerals + + + + + A, B, C, ... + + + Capital letters + + + + + a, b, c, ... + + + Lowercase letters + + + + + I, II, III, ... + + + Roman numerals (upper) + + + + + i, ii, iii, ... + + + Roman numerals (lower) + + + + + A,... AA,... AAA,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in level three is "BBB". + + + + + a,... aa,... aaa,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level two is "cc". + + + + + None + + + No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separator fields appears at the beginning of the numbered line. + + +
+ + + +

Character Style

+Select the character style of the numbering character. + + +

Show sublevels

+Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1 + + + + +

Separator Before

+Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1". + + +

Separator After

+Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1." + + +

Start at

+Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ecd2f5020 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Footnotes/Endnotes Settings +/text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp + + + + +Footnotes/Endnotes Settings +Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes. + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..697611098 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + +Footnote Settings +/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Footnote Settings

+Specifies the formatting for footnotes. +
+
+ +
+To set additional option for footnotes, choose Format - Page Style, and then click the Footnote tab. +

AutoNumbering

+ +
+

Numbering

+Select the numbering scheme that you want to use. + + + +Selection + + +Description + + + + +1, 2, 3 + + +Arabic numerals + + + + +A, B, C + + +Uppercase + + + + +a, b, c + + +Lowercase + + + + +I, II, III + + +Roman numerals (upper case) + + + + +i, ii, iii + + +Roman numerals (lower case) + + + + +A,... AA,... AAA,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "AA". + + + + +a,... aa,... aaa,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters. After the first 26 entries, the numbering restarts at "aa". + + +
+ +
+ +

Counting

+Select the numbering option for the footnotes. + + + +Option + + +Meaning + + + + +Per page + + +Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the top of each page. This option is only available if the End of page check box is selected in the Position area. + + + + +Per chapter + + +Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the beginning of each chapter. + + + + +Per document + + +Numbers the footnotes in the document sequentially. + + +
+ +

Before

+Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text. For example, type "To " to display "To 1". + +

After

+Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". +Footnote numbers are left aligned by default in the footnote area. For right aligned footnote numbers first edit the paragraph style Footnote. Press Command+TF11 to open Styles dialog and select Footnote from the list of paragraph styles. Open the local menu with right click and choose Modify. Go to the Indents & Spacing tab page and set indent to 0 before and after the paragraph, including the first line. On Tabs tab page create a tab of right type at 12pt and a tab of left type at 14pt. Then in Footnotes/Endnotes Settings dialog enter \t into the Before and After edit boxes. + +

Start at

+Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box. +

Position

+ +

End of page

+Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page. + +

End of document

+Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes. +

Styles

+To ensure a uniform appearance for the footnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnote text, and assign character styles to the footnote anchor number and the number in the footnote area. + +

Paragraph

+Select the paragraph style for the footnote text. Only special styles can be selected. + +

Page

+Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes. +This option is only available if the End of Document check box is selected in the Position area. + +

Text area

+Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document. + +

Footnote area

+Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area. +

Continuation notice

+ +

End of Footnote

+Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page. + +

Start of next page

+Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8963235c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + +Endnote Settings +/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Endnote Settings

+Specifies the formatting for endnotes. The type of endnote numbering and the Styles to apply are the options available. +
+
+ +
+ +

AutoNumbering

+ + +

Start at

+Enter the number for the first endnote in the document. This is useful if want the endnote numbering to span more than one document. + +

Before

+Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text. For example, type "re: " to display "re: 1". + +

After

+Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". +

Styles

+To ensure a uniform appearance for the endnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style, and assign character styles to the endnote anchor number and the number in the endnote area. + +

Paragraph

+Select the paragraph style for the endnote text. Only special styles can be selected. + +

Page

+Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes. + +

Text area

+Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document. + +

Endnote area

+Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5868654e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + +Convert Text to Table +/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp + + + +converting; text, into tables +text; converting to tables +tables; converting to text + + + + +Convert Text to Table +Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text. + +
+ +
+The options available in this dialog depending on the type of conversion. +Separate text at +A separator, such as a tab, marks the column boundaries in the selected text. Each paragraph in the selection is converted into a row in the table. Similarly, when you convert a table into text, the column markers are changed to the character that you specify, and each row is converted into a separate paragraph. + +Tabs +Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers. + +Semicolons +Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers. + +Paragraph +Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers. + +Other: +Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker. + +Text box +Type the character that you want to use as a column marker. + +Equal width for all columns +Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker. + + +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. + +Options + +Heading +Formats the first row of the new table as a heading. + +Repeat heading +Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans. + +The first ... rows +Repeats the first n rows as a header. + +Don't split table +Does not divide the table across pages. + +Border +Adds a border to the table and the table cells. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48f41ab73 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sort +/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp + + + +tables;sorting rows + sorting;paragraphs/table rows + text; sorting paragraphs + lines of text; sorting paragraphs + sorting;paragraphs in special languages + Asian languages;sorting paragraphs/table rows + + + + + +Sort + Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically. You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys. + +
+ +
+ Sort criteria + + + +Keys 1 to 3 + Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. + + + +Column 1 to 3 + Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para + + + +Key type 1 to 3 + Select the sorting option that you want to use. + Order + Ascending + + + +Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). + + + +Descending + Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). + Direction + +Columns + Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. + +Rows + Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. + Separator + Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. + +Tabs + If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. + + +Character + Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. + +Select + Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. + +Language + Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. + +Match case + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. + For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..826e8f33c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Calculate +/text/swriter/01/06110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Calculate + Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..537221e86 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Page Formatting +/text/swriter/01/06120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Page Formatting + Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar. +
+
+ +
+ In long documents, updating the page formatting can take a while. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1068c66f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Current Index +/text/swriter/01/06160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Current Index + Updates the current index. The current index is the one that contains the cursor. +
+
+ +
+ You can also right-click in an index or table of contents, and then choose Update Index or Table of Contents. The following commands are also available in the context menu: + + +Edit Index or Table of Contents + Edits the current index or table. + + +Delete Index or Table of Contents + Deletes the current index or table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a54bc17da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +All Indexes and Tables +/text/swriter/01/06170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +All Indexes and Tables + Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af179cc1c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + +Line Numbering +/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Line Numbering

+Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document. To exclude a paragraph from line numbering, click in the paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Outline & List tab, and then clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + You can also exclude a paragraph style from line numbering. +Line numbers are not available in HTML format. +
+ +
+ +

Show numbering

+Adds line numbers to the current document. +

View

+Set the properties of the line numbering. + +

Character Style

+Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers. + +

Format

+Select the numbering scheme that you want to use. + +

Position

+Select where you want the line numbers to appear. + +

Spacing

+Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text. + +

Interval

+Enter the counting interval for the line numbers. +

Separator

+You can enter a separator character to display between line numbers if the counting interval is more than one. + +

Text

+Enter the text that you want to use as a separator. + +

Every

+Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators. +Separators are only displayed in lines that are not numbered. +

Count

+Specify whether to include empty paragraphs or lines in frames in the line count. + +

Blank lines

+Includes empty paragraphs in the line count. + +

Lines in frames

+Adds line numbers to text in frames. The numbering restarts in each frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document. In linked frames, the numbering is not restarted. + +

Restart every new page

+Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b9c88f27d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Update All +/text/swriter/01/06190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Update All + Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ad94620ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fields +/text/swriter/01/06200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Fields + Updates the contents of all fields in the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be96318fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Links +/text/swriter/01/06210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a025da151 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +All Charts +/text/swriter/01/06220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +All Charts + Updates the charts in the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..148868b45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Update +/text/swriter/01/06990000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ updating; text documents +

Update

+ Updates items in the current document that have dynamic contents, so as fields and indexes. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..923049f5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Accessibility Check + /text/swriter/01/accessibility_check.xhp + + + + + accessibility;check in text document + PDF/UA;check + + + +
+

Accessibility Check

+ Review common accessibility problems in the document, and support for PDF/UA specifications in the PDF export dialog. +
+
+Choose Tools - Accessibility Check. +Select File - Export as PDF - General - Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA) and click OK. +
+ +The Accessibility Check tool traverses the document structure and gather all possible accessibility issues. The check can be run manually through the menu or it will be triggered after PDF export dialog, when the PDF/UA support is enabled. + +

The Accessibility Check dialog

+The Accessibility Check dialog shows a list of all issues found in the text document. +

Go to Issue

+Click the button to jump to the page and select the object or issue that requires attention for accessibility. + +

Common accessibility checks

+ +The checks that are currently implemented are: + + + Check that the document title is set. + + + Check that the document language is set, or that all styles that are in use, have the language set. + + + Check all images, graphics, OLE objects for the alt (or title in some objects) text. + + + Check that tables do not include split or merged cells, which could be disorienting for users with visual impairments. + + + Check for fake/manual numbering (not using integrated numbering). For example writing "1." "2." "3." at the beginning of the paragraphs. + + + Check that hyperlink text is not a hyperlink itself - hyperlink should be described. + + + Check for the contrast between text and the background. The algorithm is described in the WCAG specification. + + + Check for blinking text, which can be problematic for people with cognitive disabilities or photosensitive epilepsy. + + + Check for footnotes and endnotes, which should be avoided. + + + Check for heading order. Order of the headings must increase incrementally with no skips (for example Heading 1 to Heading 3, skipping Heading 2). + + + Check, if text conveys additional meaning with (direct) formatting. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..532d1e9f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Reference (Edit) + /text/swriter/01/edit_reference_submenu.xhp + + + + +
+

Reference

+A submenu that offers possibilities to edit footnotes, endnotes, index entries, and bibliography entries. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Footnote or Endnote

+ + +

Index Entry

+ + +

Bibliography Entry

+ + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c03d61a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Text Box and Shape +/text/swriter/01/format_object.xhp + + +Format Object menu in Writer + + + +
+ +

Text Box and Shape

+Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected textbox or shape. +
+ + + +Text Attributes +

Fontwork

+Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15d51ad7e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Position (List Styles - Legacy) + /text/swriter/01/legacynumbering.xhp + + + + +numbering;OpenOffice.org +OpenOffice.org legacy numbering + +
+ +

Position (List Styles - Legacy)

+
+ +
+ +
+ +%PRODUCTNAME Writer uses the position controls shown here when opening documents that use a different method for positioning and spacing. For default controls see Position (List Styles).see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt + + + + +Indent +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering area. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent. + + +Relative +Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy. + + +Width of numberingi85347 +Enter the width of the numbering area. The numbering symbol can be left, center or right in this area.UFI: fixed #i31282# + + + + + Minimum space between numbering and text. + The alignment of the numbering symbol is adjusted to get the desired minimum space. If it is not possible because the numbering area is not wide enough, then the start of the text is adjusted. + + +provides heading "Number Alignment +Aligns the numbering symbol left, center, or right in the numbering area. The position might be adjusted to maintain the minimum space. +provides note about "Number Alignment + + + + +provides Apply control help +
+Position (List Styles) +Paragraph alignment +Indenting Paragraphs +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..629a3eef0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Mail Merge Wizard +Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send email messages to many recipients. +
+
+ +
+Before starting the Mail Merge Wizard you might want to review the whole process of creating a mail merge: + + + + + + + + + +First step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document. + +
+ + Configurable Mail Merge dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe9a4c8b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting Document +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 1 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select starting document +Specify the document that you want to use as a base for the mail merge document. +
+ +Use the current document +Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document. + +Create a new document +Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge. + +Start from existing document +Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document. + +Browse +Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open. + +Start from a template +Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with. + +Browse +Opens a template selector dialog. + +Start from a recently saved starting document +Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document. + +Select the document. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7a9924b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Select document type +Specify the type of mail merge document to create. +
+Letter +Creates a printable mail merge document. +Email message +Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an email message or an email attachment. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf72b3273 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 3 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +Specify the recipients for the mail merge document as well as the layout of the address block. +
+The Mail Merge wizard opens to this page if you start the wizard in a text document that already contains address database fields. If the wizard opens directly to this page, the Select Address List button is called Select Different Address List. +The title of this page is Insert address block for letters and Select address list for email messages. + +Select Address List +Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list. +When you edit some records in a Calc spreadsheet data source that is currently in use for a mail merge, those changes are not visible in the mail merge.ufi: see i9899 + +This document shall contain an address block +Adds an address block to the mail merge document. + +Select the address block layout that you want to use. +If you select This document shall contain an address block, the third and fourth substeps become enabled on this page. Then you have to match the address block elements and the field names used in the mail. + +Suppress lines with just empty fields +Enable to leave empty lines out of the address. + +More +Opens the Select Address Block dialog. + +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. +Unless all address elements are matched with a column header, you cannot finish the Mail Merge wizard with the Finish button or continue to the fourth step of the wizard. + +Shows a preview of the address block template filled with data. + + +(Browse buttons) +Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation +Alternatively you can press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..387ad7204 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Greeting Line +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 4 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Create salutation +Specify the properties for the salutation. If the mail merge database contains gender information, you can specify different salutations based on the gender of the recipient. +
+ +This document should contain a salutation +Adds a salutation. + +Insert personalized salutation +Adds a personalized salutation to the mail merge document. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. + +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation (Female recipient) dialog. + +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation (Male recipient) dialog. + +Field name +Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. + +Field value +Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. + +General salutation +Select the default salutation that is used when you do not specify a personalized salutation. + +Preview +Displays a preview of the salutation. + +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. + + +(Browse buttons) +Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. +Next step: Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout +Alternatively you can press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2dabe402f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust Layout +/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 5 + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout +Specify the position of the address blocks and salutations on the documents. +
+Address Block Position + +From top +Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block. + +Align to text body +Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin. + +From left +Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block. +Salutation Position + +Up +Moves the salutation up. + +Down +Moves the salutation down. + + +Preview area +Provides a preview of the salutation positioning on the page. + + +Zoom +Select a magnification for the print preview. +Use the commands in the context menu of the preview to move the view up and down. +Press the Finish button and use the Mail Merge Toolbar to finish the mail merge process. +
+Mail Merge Wizard overview +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e888d2ee9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copies To +/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp + + +UFI: mail merge email copy to dialog + + + + + +Copy To +Specify additional email recipients for the mail merge document. + +CC +Enter the recipients of email copies, separated by a semicolon (;). + +BCC +Enter the recipients of email blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..899a6f201 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customize Address List +/text/swriter/01/mm_cusaddlis.xhp + + +UFI: Customize Address List dialog of mail merge + + + + + +Customize Address List +Customizes the address list for mail merge documents. + + +Address list elements +Select the fields that you want to move, delete, or rename. + + + +Add +Inserts a new text field. + + +Delete +Deletes the selected field. + + +Rename +Renames the selected text field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e22c7ffc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Custom Salutation +/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp + + +UFI: Custom Greeting Line dialog in mail merge + + + + + +Custom Salutation +Specify the salutation layout for mail merge or email merge documents. The name of this dialog is different for female recipients and male recipients. + +Salutation elements +Select a field and drag the field to the other list. + +> +Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once. + +< +Removes the selected field from the other list. + +Drag salutation elements into the box below +Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. + +Customize salutation +Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields. + +Preview +Displays a preview of the first database record with the current salutation layout. + + + + +(Arrow Buttons) +Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b40546f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Email Message +/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp + + +UFI: E-Mail Body dialog for mail merge + + + + + +Email Message +Type the message and the salutation for files that you send as email attachments. + +This email should contain a salutation +Adds a salutation to the email. + +Insert personalized salutation +Adds a personalized salutation. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. + +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a female recipient. + +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. + +New +Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a male recipient. + +Field name +Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. + +Field value +Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. + +General salutation +Select the default greeting to use if a personalized salutation cannot be created. + +Write your message here +Enter the main text of the email. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a505e5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Send merged document as email + /text/swriter/01/mm_emailmergeddoc.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Send merged document as email +Sends the mail merge output as email messages to all or some recipients. +
+ +Email options + + +To +Select the database field that contains the email address of the recipient. + + +Copy to +Opens the Copy To dialog where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses. + + +Subject +Enter the subject line for the email messages. + + +Send as +Select the mail format for the email messages. +The Plain text and HTML message formats are sent in the body of the message, whereas the *.odt, *.doc, and *.pdf formats are sent as attachments. + + +Properties +Opens the Email Message dialog where you can enter the email message for the mail merge files that are sent as attachments. + + +Name of the attachment +Shows the name of the attachment. + +Send records + + +Send all documents +Select to send emails to all recipients. + + + +From +Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. + + +From +Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge. + + +To +Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge. + + +Send Documents +Click to start sending emails. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c97f59f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Find Entry +/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp + + +UFI: Find Entry dialog of mail merge + + + + + +Find Entry +Searches for a record or recipient in the mail merge address list. + + +Find +Enter the search term. + + +Find only in +Restricts the search to one data field. + + +Select the data field where you want to search for the text. + + +Find +Displays the next record that contains the search text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8e061ac5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Match Fields +/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp + + +UFI: Match Fields dialog for mail merge + + + + + +Match Fields +Matches the logical field names of the layout dialog to the field names in your database when you create new address blocks or salutations. + + +Matches to field: +Select a field name in your database for each logical address element. + + +Address block preview +Displays a preview of the values of the first data record. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1c8782f72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Address Block / Edit Address Block +/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp + + +UFI: New Address Block dialog for mail merge + + + +New Address Block or Edit Address Block +Specify the placement of address data fields in an address block in mail merge documents. + +Address elements +Select an address field and drag the field to the other list. + +> +Adds the selected field from the Address Elements list to the other list. You can add the same field more than once. + +< +Removes the selected field from the other list. + +Drag address elements here +Arrange the fields with drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. + +Preview +Displays a preview of the first database record with the current address block layout. + +(Arrow Buttons) +Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9851f672f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Address List +/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp + + +UFI: New Address List dialog for mail merge + + + + + +New Address List +Enter new addresses or edit the addresses for mail merge documents. When you click OK, a dialog prompts you for the location to save the address list. + + +Address Information +Enter or edit the field contents for each mail merge recipient. + + + + + + + +Show Entry Number +Click the buttons to navigate through the records or enter a record number to display a record. + + +New +Adds a new blank record to the address list. + + +Delete +Deletes the selected record. + + +Find +Opens the Find Entry dialog. You can leave the dialog open while you edit the entries. + + +Customize +Opens the Customize Address List dialog where you can rearrange, rename, add, and delete fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bf857598 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Print merged document + /text/swriter/01/mm_printmergeddoc.xhp + + + + + + + + +Printer options + +Printer +Select the printer. + + +Properties +Changes the printer properties. + +Print records + +Print all documents +Prints documents for all recipients. + + +From +Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. + + +From +Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge. + + +To +Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge. + + +Print Documents +Prints the mail merge documents. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92c9e83c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Save merged document + /text/swriter/01/mm_savemergeddoc.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Save merged document +Save the mail merge output to file. +
+ +Save As options + + +Save as single large document +Saves the merged document as a single file. + + +Save as individual documents +Saves the merged document as a separate file for each recipient. The file names of the documents are constructed from the name that you enter, followed by an underscore, and the number of the current record. + + +From +Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. + + +From +Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge. + + +To +Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge. + + +Save Documents +Saves the documents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..919594e4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Address Block +/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp + + +UFI: Select Address Block dialog for mail merge + + + + + +Select Address Block +Select, edit, or delete an address block layout for mail merge. + + +Select your preferred address block +Select the block in the list that you want to use for mail merge addresses, and click OK. + + +Never include country/region +Excludes country or regional information from the address block. + + +Always include country/region +Includes country or regional information in the address block. + + +Only include country/region if it is not: +Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box. + + +Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed. + + +New +Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout. + + +Edit +Opens the Edit Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout. + + +Delete +Deletes the selected address block layout. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73a05ae81 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Address List +/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp + + +UFI: mail merge select address list dialog + + + + + +Select Address List +Select the address list that you want to use for mail merge, then click OK. + +Add +Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list. If the file contains more than one table, the Select Table dialog opens. + +Create +Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list. + +Filter +Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see. + +Edit +Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list. + +Change Table +Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..94941febb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Select Table +/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp + + + + + +Select Table +Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses. +Preview +Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7da989e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Outline Content Visibility + /text/swriter/01/outlinecontent_visibility.xhp + + + + +outline content folding;enabling +show;outline folding +hide;outline folding + + +

Outline Folding

+Hide and show all content under headings, including text, images, tables, frames, shapes, and text boxes. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web) - View, and select the Show Outline Folding Buttons checkbox. + Open the Navigator (F5) and display the Headings entry. Hover the mouse on a heading and open the context menu. Select Outline Folding submenu. +
+Use this feature to selectively hide and show contents under all paragraphs that have a non-zero outline level, usually headings. In large documents, it allows to quickly scroll to the right position for editing and reading. + + +navigator;outline folding +outline folding;with Navigator + + +

Using Outline Folding with Navigator

+ All outline folding commands in the navigator are shown in the context menu of the Headings entries. Open the context menu of a heading and choose Outline Folding. + + + + +Headings Icon + + + + Headings icon + + +
+

Fold all

+Hides all contents for the selected heading and its sub-headings. Sibling outline headings with same level are not hidden. If applied on the main Headings entry of the navigator, only the document headings are displayed. +

Unfold all

+ Headings and its sub-headings contents are displayed in the document area. If applied on the main Headings entry of the navigator, the document is displayed in full. +

Toggle

+ Toggles the outline folding of the selected item. + + +outline folding;with mouse + +

Using Outline Folding with the Mouse

+

Over a heading

+ Press the CommandCtrl key and place the mouse over a heading. An arrow in left margin gives a visual cue. + When mouse pointer image changes to hand pointer, the following commands are possible: + + + Click to toggle folding of content from selected heading to next heading. + + + Right-click to hide or show all content from selected heading (and all its subheadings) to next heading at same outline level. + + + +

Arrows in left margin

+ Place mouse in left margin next to a heading. An arrow appears if content is shown. + + + A down arrow indicates the heading and its contents are visible. + + + A left arrow indicates the heading has hidden contents. + + +

Saving Document Outline Folding State

+Documents saved in Open Document Format (.odt) will retain the current settings of hidden and shown contents at time of the save command. +The document contents are not affected by the folding settings. +

Printing and exporting to PDF with Outline Folding Contents

+To print or to export the full document, set the outline folding to Unfold All beforehand. +Folded outline contents will not be printed or exported to PDF. +
+Set Paragraph Outline Level + Modify Outline Levels for Headings + + Adding a Button to a Toolbar +Customizing a Context Menu +Making a Shortcut Key +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fce04fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Protect Document + /text/swriter/01/protectdocument.xhp + + + + +protection;fields in text documents +protection;bookmarks in text documents + + + +
+

Protect Document

+Toggles write protection for fields and bookmarks in the document. +
+ +
+ +
+

Protect Fields

+Toggles fields write protection. When checked, the fields cannot be edited or deleted. +

Protect Bookmarks

+Toggles bookmark write protection. When checked, the bookmarks cannot be deleted or renamed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03ae6221c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Selection Mode +/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp + + + +
+Selection Mode +Choose the selection mode from the submenu: normal selection mode, or block selection mode. +
+
+ +
+In normal selection mode, you can select multi-line text including the line ends. +In block selection mode, you can select a rectangular block of text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6efb1e722 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + Show Whitespace + /text/swriter/01/show_whitespace.xhp + + + +
+ +

Show Whitespace

+ Displays the document with the top and bottom margins, header and footer and a gap between pages. Uncheck to collapse all the elements cited and display the document in a contiguous page stream. Hiding whitespace is only possible in Single-page view. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..713b72c4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Style Inspector + /text/swriter/01/style_inspector.xhp + + + + + +styles;inspector +style inspector + +
+

Style Inspector

+ The Style Inspector is located on the Sidebar. It displays all the attributes of the styles (paragraph and character) and any direct formatting present in the paragraph and character where the cursor is located. These details can be useful when you are trying to figure out why some formatting in a document appears to be incorrect or inconsistent. +
+ +
+ Open the sidebar, click on the Style Inspector icon + + + + + Icon Style Inspector + + + + Icon Style Inspector on the Sidebar + + +
+ Press CommandCtrl+Alt+5 +
+

The Style Inspector Panel

+

Properties

+ Paragraph Styles: shows the list of the paragraph styles applied to the text at the cursor position, following the style hierarchy, where the parent style comes above any child style. + + Paragraph direct formatting: shows the list of paragraph properties which are set directly to the text at the cursor location. + + Character Styles: shows the list of the character styles applied to the text at the cursor, following hierarchy, where the parent style comes above any child style. + + Character direct formatting: shows the list of character properties which are set directly to the text at the cursor location. + +

Values

+ Display the values of the properties. +

Usage

+ Use the Style Inspector to uncover formatting issues in your text document. + + + Style properties overwritten by direct formatting are greyed out in the Paragraph and Character style tree, indicating that the style property is not effective anymore. + + + Paragraph style properties that are re-defined by a child paragraph style are greyed out. + + + Character style properties that are re-defined by a child character style are greyed out. + + + Paragraph style and direct properties that are re-defined by character styles or character direct properties are greyed. + + + For example, if the margins of the paragraph are changed by direct formatting using the rulers, the margins property of the paragraph style are greyed out and the margins properties are displayed in the Paragraph Direct Formatting entry of the Style Inspector. + + Another example, if the Emphasis character style highlights a word with a yellow background, and the user mistakenly overwrote it by using a white background, the yellow attribute would be greyed-out and white is listed under Direct Formatting in the Style Inspector. The Style Inspector shows only those attributes that diverge from the parent (which is usually the Default Paragraph Style). + + Some features of the Style Inspector are of interest mainly to advanced users: + + + The Style Inspector can show any hidden RDF (Resource Description Framework, a W3C standard) metadata at the cursor position associated with text spans, paragraphs, and bookmarks. For annotated text spans, “Nested Text Content” item can show the boundary of the nested annotated text ranges and metadata fields. + + + Custom color metadata field shadings can be set for an annotated text range or a metadata field, for visualization of metadata categories in the document editor. Use View - Field Shadings or press CommandCtrl+F8 to disable or enable these field shadings. + + +
+ Release notes for Style Inspector + RDF Metadata in Style Inspector + Custom color metadata +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7aaeeda52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + Using title pages in your document + /text/swriter/01/title_page.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + + + page;title page + title pages;first page style + title pages;modifying + title pages;inserting + + + +Inserting title pages in the document +Insert title pages in your document. +
+Title pages are pages at the beginning of the document that lists the publication information, such as the title of the publication, the name of the author etc. These pages have a different layout than the pages of the document body, because they may not have page numbering, sometimes a different heading and footer and even different margins settings or background. + +
+Choose menu Format - Title Page +
+Many documents, such as letters and reports, have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document. For example, the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer, while the other pages do. This is simple to achieve with %PRODUCTNAME Writer. +Page header and footer, numbering, margins and orientation are some of the properties that belongs to page styles. %PRODUCTNAME Writer let your to insert a blank title page at any point of your document, or format an existing page like a title page, by inserting a page break followed by a page style of your choice or by changing the page style at cursor position. +Using the Default (or any other) page style for your document, you can add a header or footer as you wish to the first page by deselecting the Same content on first page option on the header/footer tabs in the Page Style dialog, and then adding the header or footer. You can then add a different header or footer to the other pages of the document. + +To convert the first page of the document into a title page + + + + Place the cursor on the first page, + + + From the Menu Bar, choose Format - Title page… + + + Select Converting existing pages to title pages + + + Select the style of the title page in the Edit Page Properties area + + +By default, %PRODUCTNAME selects the First Page page style. + + + + Set the page numbering reset options. + + + Click OK. + + +This will change the current page style to First Page and the following pages will have the Default Style. + +To insert a title page anywhere in the document +Place the cursor where you want to insert a new title page. + + + + From the menu bar select Format - Title page. + + + Select Insert new title pages + + + Set number of title pages to add and + + + Set the title page location by setting its page number in the spin box. + + + Set the page numbering reset options. + + + Click OK + + +This will insert a page break and change the current page style to First Page. The following pages will have the Default Style page style. + +To delete a title page: +You cannot delete a title page. You must change its page style format from First Page to whatever other page style you wish. + + + + Place the cursor in the page you want to change the style + + + From the Sidebar Deck, select Sidebar Settings - Styles. + + + From the Styles, select button Page Styles. + + + From the Style list, select the page style you want to apply. + + + Double click on the page style to apply. + + + +
+ + + + Format page, + + + Page break, + + + Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page. + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2c222ecd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Page Watermark + /text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + Page Watermark + Insert a watermark text in the current page style background. + + watermark;text documents + watermark;page background + page background;watermark + +
+
+ Choose Format - Watermark. +
+ A watermark is an identifying image or pattern in paper that appears as various shades of brightness when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were originally created directly during paper manufacturing to discourage counterfeiting of documents, currency bills, stamps and more. + Use watermarks in %PRODUCTNAME Writer to simulate a paper watermark on the document pages. + Fill the dialog settings below. + The values entered applies to the actual page style. + Watermark dialog + + Text + Enter the watermark text to be displayed as image in the page background. + + Font + Select the font from the list. + You cannot choose font size or font style for the watermark text. The text size will be scaled to fit in one line in the page background. + + Angle + Select the rotation angle for the watermark. The text will be rotated by this angle in counterclockwise direction. + + Transparency + Select the transparency level for the watermark. A 0% value produces an opaque watermark and a value of 100% is totally transparent (invisible). + + Color + Select a color from the drop-down box. + To change a watermark contents or setting. + If the watermark in use is a text inserted by the Format - Watermark menu command or by the document classification settings, you can edit the contents and settings on opening the watermark dialog. +
+ Document classification watermarks + Page background +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7a76464f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Toggle Ordered List +/text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+
+ +

Toggle Ordered List

+Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs. +
+To define the numbering format, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. To display the Bullets and Numbering Bar, choose View - Toolbars - Bullets and Numbering.UFI changed last sentence, see #60925 +
+Some of the bullets and numbering options are not available when working in the Web Layout.UFI: online layout is now web layout +
+ + + + +Toggle Ordered List Icon + + +Toggle Ordered List + + +
+ +
+
+Bullets and Numbering +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3bb78cf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Link Frames +/text/swriter/02/03210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+Choose Format - Frame and Object - Link Frames. +On the Format bar, click the Link Frames icon. +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca9da786a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Unlink Frames +/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03c8e703e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Rows +/text/swriter/02/04090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; inserting rows +rows; inserting in tables, using icon + + +Insert Rows +Inserts one or more rows in the table, below the selection. You can insert more than one row by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Rows), or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon. The second method inserts rows of the same height as the originally selected rows. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Row + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..775ddfa06 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert Column +/text/swriter/02/04100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tables; inserting columns in +columns; inserting in tables + + +Insert Column +Inserts one or more columns into the table, after the selection. You can insert several columns at the same time by opening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Columns), or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon. If the latter method is used, the columns inserted will have the same relative width as the selected columns. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Column + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..016d55239 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Table: Fixed +/text/swriter/02/04220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table: Fixed

+ If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect only the neighboring lines or columns in question. + + + + + + + Icon Table: Fixed + + + Table: Fixed + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9feda413c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Table: Fixed, Proportional +/text/swriter/02/04230000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table: Fixed, Proportional

+ If this mode is active, changes to the line and/or column affect the entire table. + + + + + + + Icon Table: Fixed, Proportional + + + Table: Fixed, Proportional + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5165bbd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + +Table: Variable +/text/swriter/02/04240000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Table: Variable

+ If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect the size of the table. + + + + + + + Icon Table: Variable + + + Table: Variable + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..657d6cdb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Sum +/text/swriter/02/04250000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Sum

+Activates the sum function. Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear. +
+ +%PRODUCTNAME recognizes the cell range for the sum function as long as the cells are filled with numbers. Prior to entering the data, you must choose Table - Number Recognition to enable this feature. +Click Apply to accept the sum formula as it appears in the entry line. +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Sum + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b2f5ac8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +No List +/text/swriter/02/06040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ +

No List

+ Removes numbering or bullets and list indenting for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. +
+
+ + + + Icon No List + + + No List + + +
+
+ + To preserve indenting, but remove bullet or number, place cursor at the beginning of the paragraph and press Backspace. + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30c5b8590 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Demote Outline Level with Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +i66535, was Shift down with Subpoints +

Demote Outline Level with Subpoints

+Demotes the list of a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to the next list level. Multiple list paragraphs can be selected. Demotes the outline level of a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings to the next outline level. This command is active only when the cursor is positioned in a list paragraph or a chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Demote Outline Level with Subpoints + + +Demote Outline Level With Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e36bc1df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Promote Outline Level With Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +i66535, was Shift up with Subpoints +

Promote Outline Level With Subpoints

+Promotes the list level of a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to the next list level. Multiple list paragraphs can be selected. Promotes the outline level of a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings to the next outline level. This command is active only when the cursor is positioned in a list paragraph or chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Promote Outline Level With Subpoints + + +Promote Outline Level With Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f868b841a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Unnumbered Entry +/text/swriter/02/06090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Insert Unnumbered Entry +Inserts a paragraph without numbering. The existing numbering will not be affected. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Unnumbered Entry + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..de7ebfa42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Move Item Up with Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Move Item Up with Subpoints

+ Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to before the previous list paragraph with the same list level. Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings and text to before the previous heading at the same outline level. You can also select and move more than one list paragraph or chapter heading. This command is only active when the cursor is positioned within a list paragraph or chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + Icon Move Up with Subpoints + + + Move Item Up with Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e61e7d1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Move Item Down with Subpoints +/text/swriter/02/06130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Move Item Down with Subpoints

+ Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located and its subpoints to after the following list paragraph with the same list level. Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located and all its subheadings and text to after the following heading at the same outline level. You can also select and move more than one list paragraph or chapter heading. This command is only active when the cursor is positioned in a list paragraph or chapter heading. +
+
+ + + + Icon Move Down with Subpoints + + + Move Item Down with Subpoints + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f12be81f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Restart Numbering + /text/swriter/02/06140000.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Restart Numbering

+ Restarts list numbering from 1. This command is only active when the cursor is positioned within a list. +
+
+ Choose Format - Lists - Restart Numbering. + Place cursor in a list paragraph, right-click and choose List - Restart Numbering. + On Bullets and Numbering bar, click +
+
+ + + + Icon Restart Numbering + + + Restart Numbering + + +
+
+ + + To remove the numbering restart, apply the command again in the paragraph where the numbering was restarted. + + + To restart numbering with a number greater than 1, right-click in the paragraph where you want to restart numbering, choose Paragraph - Paragraph - Outline & List tab, select Restart numbering at this paragraph and enter the start number in Start with. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0a9d407c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Page Number +/text/swriter/02/08010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Page Number +The current page number is displayed in this field of the status bar. A click opens "Go to Page", with which you can navigate in the document. A right-click shows all bookmarks in the document. Click a bookmark to position the text cursor at the bookmark location. +
+The displayed page (x) and the total number of pages (y) are shown in the form Page x/y When you scroll through a document with the mouse, the page number is displayed when you release the mouse button. When you scroll using the right scrollbar, the page numbers are displayed as a Help tip. The page numbering format of the status bar and scrollbar is identical. +You can turn the Navigator display on or off by double-clicking the Page Number field. +To go to a specific page, enter the page number in the Page spin button in the Navigator and then press Enter. +By pressing the shortcut keys Shift+Command +Ctrl+F5, you switch to entering a page number. When you press Enter, the cursor moves to the selected page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca88ca4c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combined Display +/text/swriter/02/08080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Combined Display + Displays current information about the active document. +
+ When the cursor is in a named section, the section name appears. When the cursor is in a table, the name of the table cell appears. The size of the object is shown when you edit frames or drawing objects. + When the cursor is positioned within text, you can double-click this field to open the Fields dialog. In this dialog, you can define a field to be inserted in your document at the current cursor position. When the cursor is positioned in a table, a double-click in this field will call the Table Format dialog. Depending on the object selected, you can call up a dialog to edit a section, a graphic object, a floating frame, an OLE object, direct numbering or the position and size of a drawing object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f008fb0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Zoom In +/text/swriter/02/10010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Zoom In

+ Zooms in to get a close-up view of the document. +
+
+ + + + Icon Zoom In + + + Zoom In + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c8b65d691 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Zoom Out +/text/swriter/02/10020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Zoom Out

+Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size. +
+
+ + + + +Zoom Out Icon + + +Zoom Out + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8714571a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Preview Zoom +/text/swriter/02/10030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Preview Zoom +Determines the zoom level of the print preview. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a2329c4e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Single Page Preview + /text/swriter/02/10040000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Single Page Preview

+Displays one page at a time in the Print Preview window. +
+
+ + + + +Single Page Preview Icon + + + Single Page Preview + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c3ddeac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Two Pages Preview +/text/swriter/02/10050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +

Two Pages Preview

+ Displays two pages in the Print Preview window. Uneven numbers will always appear on the right side, even numbers on the left. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Two Pages Preview + + + Two Pages Preview + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be7c44554 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Multiple Pages Preview +/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Multiple Pages Preview

+Defines the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Multiple Pages Preview + + +Multiple Pages Preview + + +
+
+After clicking the Multiple Pages Preview icon, move the mouse over the desired number of rows and columns. +

More Options

+You can also choose settings by clicking More Options to open a new dialog, then use the two spin buttons to set the number of pages to be displayed. + +

Rows

+Defines the number of rows of pages. + +

Columns

+Defines the number of pages shown in columns. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d79ac485 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Book preview +/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp + + +UFI: new icon Spec doc "BookPreview" + + + +previews;book preview +book previews + +
+ +

Book preview

+Select to display the first page on the right side in the print preview. If not selected, the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview. +
+
+ + + + +book preview icon + + +Book Preview + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c9d52f22 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print page view + /text/swriter/02/10090000.xhp + + + +
+ +Print page viewremove this pageid="par_id3151170" <AVIS hid=".uno:PrintPagePreview">Opens the Print dialog to print the page preview. Use the Print options page view icon to set the printing scale and other printing properties.</AVIS> +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Print page view + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58e43b704 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cell Reference +/text/swriter/02/14010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Cell Reference +Displays the position of the cell cursor in a table. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b72bb1d76 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,661 @@ + + + + + +Formula +/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp + + + +
+ +formulas; in text documents +operators; in table formulas +statistical functions in tables +mathematical functions in tables +trigonometric functions in tables +pages;number of pages in table formulas +variables;document properties in table formulas +arithmetical operators in formulas + + + + +

Formula

+Opens a submenu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table. Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear. Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu. +
+The formula appears in the input line. To specify a range of cells in a table, select the desired cells with the mouse. The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line. Enter additional parameters, as necessary, and click Apply to confirm your entry. You can also enter the formula directly if you know the appropriate syntax. This is necessary, for example, in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogs. +
+ With the cursor in a table, press F2 +In the Table toolbar, press the Formula icon. +
+ + + + +Formula icon in Table toolbar + + +Formula + + +
+
+
+

Summary of Formula Options

+

Basic Calculation Functions

+ + + + Operation + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +Addition + + ++ + + +Calculates the total. +Example: <A1> + 8 + + + + +Subtraction + + +- + + +Calculates the difference +Example: 10 - <B5> + + + + +Multiplication + + +MUL or * + + +Calculates the product. +Example: 7 MUL 9 + + + + +Division + + +DIV or / + + +Calculates the quotient +Example: 100 DIV 15 + + +
+

Basic Functions in the Submenu

+ + + + Function + + + Name + + + Example + + + + + +Sum + + +SUM + + +Calculates the sum of the selected cells. +Example: SUM <A2:C2> displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 + + + + +Round + + +ROUND + + +Rounds a number to the specified decimal places. +Example: 15.678 ROUND 2 displays 15.68 + + + + +Percent + + +PHD + + +Calculates a percentage +Example: 10 + 15 PHD displays 10.15 + + + + +Square Root + + +SQRT + + +Calculates the square root. +Example: SQRT 25 displays 5.00 + + + + +Power + + +POW + + +Calculates the power of a number. +Example: 2 POW 8 displays 256.00 + + +
+

Operators

+You can insert various operators in your formula. Choose from the following functions: + + + + Operator + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +List Separator + + +| + + +Separates the elements in a list. +Example of using a list: +MIN 10|20|50|<C6>|<A2:B6>|20 + + + + +Equal + + +EQ or == + + +Checks if selected values are equal. If they are unequal, the result is zero, otherwise 1 (true) appears. +Example: <A1> EQ 2 displays 1, if the content of A1 equals 2. + + + + +Not Equal + + +NEQ or != + + +Tests for inequality between selected values. +Example: <A1> NEQ 2 displays 0 (wrong), if the content of A1 equals 2. + + + + +Less than or Equal + + +LEQ + + +Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value. +Example: <A1> LEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2. + + + + +Greater than or Equal + + +GEQ + + +Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value +Example: <A1> GEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2. + + + + +Less + + +L + + +Tests for values less than a specified value +Example: <A1> L 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than 2. + + + + +Greater + + +G + + +Tests for values greater than a specified value +Example: <A1> G 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than 2. + + + + +Boolean Or + + +OR + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean OR +Example: 0 OR 0 displays 0 (false), anything else results in 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean X Or + + +XOR + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR +Example: 1 XOR 0 displays 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean And + + +AND + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean AND +Example: 1 AND 2 displays 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean Not + + +NOT + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT +Example: NOT 1 (true) displays 0 (false) + + +
+

Statistical Functions

+You can choose from the following statistical functions: + + + + Function + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +Mean + + +MEAN + + +Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list. +Example: MEAN 10|30|20 displays 20 + + + + +Minimum Value + + +MIN + + +Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list. +Example: MIN 10|30|20 displays 10 + + + + +Maximum Value + + +MAX + + +Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list. +Example: MAX 10|30|20 displays 30.00 + + + + + Product + + + PRODUCT + + + Calculates the product of the selected cells. + Example: PRODUCT <A2:C2> displays the product of the values in cells A2 to C2 + + + + + Count + + + COUNT + + + Counts the number of non empty cells. + Example: COUNT <A2:C2> displays the number of non empty cells in A2 to C2. + + +
+

Functions

+You can choose from the following functions: + + + + Function + + + Name + + + Example + + + + +Sine + + +SIN + + +Calculates the sine in radians +Example: SIN (PI/2) + + + + +Cosine + + +COS + + +Calculates the cosine in radians. +Example: COS 1 + + + + +Tangent + + + TAN + + +Calculates the tangent in radians. +Example: TAN <A1> + + + + +Arc Sine + + +ASIN + + +Calculates the arc sine in radians. +Example: ASIN 1 + + + + +Arc Cosine + + +ACOS + + +Calculates the arc cosine in radians. +Example: ACOS 1 + + + + +Arc Tangent + + +ATAN + + +Calculates the arc tangent in radians. +Example: ATAN 1 + + + + + Absolute value + + + ABS + + + Returns the absolute value of the number. + Example: ABS -34 returns 34 + + + + + Sign + + + SIGN + + + Returns the algebraic sign of the number. + Example: SIGN -23 returns -1 + + +
+

Variables for document properties

+The following document properties are also found under File - Properties - Statistics. + + + + Name + + + Description + + + + +CHAR + + +Number of characters in the document + + + + +WORD + + +Number of words in the document + + + + +PARA + + +Number of paragraphs in the document + + + + +GRAPH + + +Number of graphics in the document + + + + +TABLES + + +Number of tables in the document + + + + +OLE + + +Number of OLE objects in the document + + + + +PAGE + + +Total number of pages in the document + + +
+

More Defined Values

+ + + + Description + + + Name + + + Value + + + + +PI + + +PI + + +3.1415... + + + + +Euler's constant + + +E + + +2.71828... + + + + +True + + +TRUE + + +not equal to 0 + + + + +False + + +FALSE + + +0 + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..57e93e26d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel +/text/swriter/02/14030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Cancel +Clears the contents of the input line and closes the formula bar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Cancel + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d0c050b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Apply +/text/swriter/02/14040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Apply

+ Transfers the contents of the input line into your document and closes the formula bar. The contents of the input line are inserted at the cursor position in the document. +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Apply + + + Apply + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..80ad856e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formula Area +/text/swriter/02/14050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Formula Area + Allows you to create a formula by typing it directly into the input line or by clicking the Formula icon to display the formulas in submenu. +
+
+ + + + + + + Formula area with formula + + + Formula Area + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a86d2d8e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Insert +/text/swriter/02/18010000.xhp + + + +
+ +Insert +The toolbar contains various functions for inserting frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. +
+You can select the following functions: +Table + + +Section + + +Insert Frame Manually + + +Floating Frame + + +Insert Footnote Directly + + +Insert Endnote Directly + + +Note +Inserts a note at the current cursor position. +Bookmark + +UFI: "insert cross reference" hereFile + + +AutoText + +Special Character + + +Insert Fields +Inserts a field at the current cursor position. + +Controls +The Controls icon opens a toolbar with the tools that you need to create an interactive form. + +From File + + + + +Formula + + +Chart + +OLE ObjectUFI: this may be called "Insert Object" in UI, but is not the removed "Insert Object" bar + +Insert Index +Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. +Entry + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..098f74f4c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Fields +/text/swriter/02/18030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Insert Fields +Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu. Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a submenu.UFI: changed to fix #i20539# + +You can choose from the following functions: + + + + + + + +Other + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be060bd17 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Date +/text/swriter/02/18030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Date +Inserts the current date as a field. The default date format is used, and the date is not automatically updated. +
+
+ +
+If you would like to define a different date format, or have the date updated automatically, select Insert - Field - More Fields to insert a field command and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The format of an existing date field can be modified at any time by choosing Edit - Fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d83c0635 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Time +/text/swriter/02/18030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ time fields;insertingfields;inserting time + +Time + Inserts the current time as a field. The time is taken directly from the system settings of your operating system. A fixed time format is applied, which cannot be updated by using the F9 function key. +
+
+ +
+ To assign a different time format, or adapt the actual time data, select Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired changes in the Fields dialog. Additionally, you can modify the format of an inserted time field at any time by choosing Edit - Fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5523ec75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Page Number + /text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Page Number +Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position. The default setting is for it to use the Page Number character style. +
+ +
+ +
+If you would like to define a different format or modify the page number, insert a field with Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. It is also possible to edit a field inserted with the Page Number command with Edit - Fields. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..355896c11 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Page Count +/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Page Count

+Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document. +
+
+ +
+The format of the field inserted using the Page Count command can be modified using the Edit - Fields command. +
+Document Statistics Fields +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e39399a34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Subject +/text/swriter/02/18030500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+subject fields +fields; subject + + +Subject +Inserts the subject specified in the document properties as a field . This field displays the data entered in the Subject field under File - Properties - Description. +
+
+ +
+If you would like to insert a different document property as a field, select Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The DocInformation category contains all of the fields shown in the document properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9fa4ed853 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Title +/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Title +Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title field under File - Properties - Description. +
+
+ +
+If you would like to insert a different document property as a field, select Insert - Field - More Fields and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The DocInformation category contains all of the fields shown in the document properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0e6b4258 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +First Author (field) +/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +First Author (field) +Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84a1651cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Images and Charts + /text/swriter/02/18120000.xhp + + + + + + + +

Images and Charts

+ + graphics;do not show + images;do not show + pictures;do not show + + +If the Images and Charts icon on the Tools bar is activated, no graphics are displayed - only empty frames as placeholders. + + + + + Icon Images and Charts + + + Images and Charts + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46ef9a6fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Direct Cursor Mode +/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp + + + +direct cursor; restriction + + +

Direct Cursor Mode

+Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. +
+ +On Tools bar, click + + + + +Icon Toggle Direct Cursor Mode + + + +Toggle Direct Cursor Mode + + +
+ +
+The direct cursor allows you to click in any blank area of a page to place text, images, tables, frames, and other objects. +If you place the direct cursor approximately in the middle between the left and the right margin of a page or a table cell, the text you insert will be centered. Similarly, text is right-aligned when the direct cursor is placed on the right margin. +The AutoCorrect tool automatically removes empty paragraphs, tabs, and spaces that are inserted by the direct cursor. If you want to use the direct cursor, then disable the AutoCorrect tool. + +The direct cursor sets tabs to position the cursor. If you change the tabs later. the position of the text on the page may change as well. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e8d3d5a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Header +/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f93daa84a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Footer +/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97b4e93df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert +/text/swriter/02/19030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Insert +Click the arrow next to the icon to open a toolbar with various functions for inserting graphics, tables, documents, and special characters. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Insert + + +
+ +You can select the following functions: +Insert single-column frame manually + + +From File + + +Insert Table + + +Insert Document + + +Insert Special Character + + +Insert Section + + +Insert Bookmark + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34b79493f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Fields +/text/swriter/02/19040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Insert Fields +Click to open the Fields dialog. Click the arrow next to the icon and select the required field from the submenu. +You can select the following functions: + + + +UFI added two lines, see #i60664 + + +Other + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5333208fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Text Animation +/text/swriter/02/19050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+

Text Animation

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Text Animation + + + Text Animation + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9343a6222 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Add to List + /text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp + + + +
+ +Add to List +Lists;merging + +

Add to List

+Include selected paragraphs, whether a list item or not, as part of a list. +
+
+Choose Format - Lists - Add to List. +Right-click a paragraph, choose List - Add to List. +On Bullets and Numbering bar, click Add to List icon. +
+ + + + Add to List Icon + + + Add to List + + +
+
+
+The list labeling and indent formatting are applied to the selected paragraphs. The position of the paragraphs in the document does not change. + +

Add Consecutive List Entries to an Immediately Prior List

+ + + Select one or more consecutive list entries, starting from the first entry, that you want to add to the immediately prior list. + + + + + +Use this procedure to combine two lists. + +

Add Selected Paragraphs to a List

+ + + Select paragraphs, whether in a list or not, to be added to a list. + For multiple selections, press and hold the Ctrl key after the first selection. Only one character needs to be selected in each paragraph to be added. The Ctrl key can be released without losing the selections, but must be pressed whenever clicking in the document to preserve the selection. + + + Press and hold the Ctrl key, select at least one character in the list, then release the Ctrl key. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + + + + + + Right-click anywhere in highlighted selection, choose List - Add to List. + + +This procedure works for ordered and unordered lists. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26a68d647 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + + +Word Count Status Bar Field +/text/swriter/02/word_count_stb.xhp + + +Muhammad Haggag. + + + +
+ +Word Count Status Bar Field +The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed745db06 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,1108 @@ + + + + + + + Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer + /text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+shortcut keys; in text documents + text documents; shortcut keys in + +

Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer +

+ You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in %PRODUCTNAME. This section lists the default shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + +
+ You can also use the general shortcut keys in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Function Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + F2 + + + Formula Bar + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F2 + + + Insert Fields + + + + + F3 + + + Complete AutoText + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F3 + + + Edit AutoText + + + + + Shift+F4 + + + Select next frameUFI: see spec "OpenDocumentBehavior" + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+F4 + + + Open Data Source View + + + + + F5 + + + Navigator on/off + + + + + Shift+F5 + + + Moves the cursor to the position that it had when the document was last saved before it was last closed. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F5 + + + Navigator on, go to page number + + + + + F7 + + + Spelling + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F7 + + + Thesaurus + + + + + F8 + + + Extension mode + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F8 + + + Field shadings on / off + + + + + Shift+F8 + + + Additional selection mode + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + + Block selection mode + + + + + F9 + + + Update fields + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F9 + + + Show fields + + + + + Shift+F9 + + + Calculate Table + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F9 + + + Update Input Fields and Input ListsUFI: fixes #i30104# + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F10 + + + Nonprinting Characters on/off + + + + + Command+TF11 + + + Styles window on/off + + + + + Shift+F11 + + + Create Style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F11 + + + Sets focus to Apply Style boxi81468 + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F11 + + + Update Style + + + + + F12 + + + Toggle Ordered List + + + + + Command +Ctrl+F12 + + + Insert or edit Table + + + + + Shift+F12 + + + Toggle Unordered List + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+F12 + + + Ordered / Unordered List off + + +
+ +

Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Command +Ctrl+A + + + Select All + + + + + Command +Ctrl+J + + + Justify + + + + + Command +Ctrl+D + + + Double Underline + + + + + Command +Ctrl+E + + + Centered + + + + + Command +Ctrl+H + + + Find and Replace + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+P + + + Superscript + + + + + Command +Ctrl+L + + + Align Left + + + + + Command +Ctrl+R + + + Align Right + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+B + + + Subscript + + + + + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y + + + Redo last action + + + + + Command +Ctrl+0 (zero) + + + Apply Text Body paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+1 + + + Apply Heading 1 paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+2 + + + Apply Heading 2 paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl+3 + + + Apply Heading 3 paragraph style + + + + + + Command +Ctrl+4 + + + Apply Heading 4 paragraph style + + + + + + + Command +Ctrl+5 + + + Apply Heading 5 paragraph style + + + + + Command +Ctrl + Plus Key(+) + + + Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Hyphen(-) + + + Soft hyphens; hyphenation set by you. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) + + + Non-breaking hyphen (is not used for hyphenation) + + + + + Command +Ctrl+multiplication sign * (only on number pad) + + + Run macro field + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Space + + + Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + Line break without paragraph change + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Enter + + + Manual page break + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Enter + + + Column break in multicolumnar texts + + + + + Option +Alt+Enter + + + Inserting a new paragraph without numbering inside a list. Does not work when the cursor is at the end of the list. + + + + + Option +Alt+Enter + + + Insert a new paragraph directly before or after a section or table. + For sections, the cursor must be placed at the first or last character. For tables, the cursor must be placed at the first character of the first cell or the last character of the last cell. + + + + + Arrow Left + + + Move cursor to left + + + + + Shift+Arrow Left + + + Move cursor with selection to the left + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Arrow Left + + + Go to beginning of word + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left + + + Selecting to the left word by word + + + + + Arrow Right + + + Move cursor to right + + + + + Shift+Arrow Right + + + Move cursor with selection to the right + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Arrow Right + + + Go to start of next word + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right + + + Selecting to the right word by word + + + + + Arrow Up + + + Move cursor up one line + + + + + Shift+Arrow Up + + + Selecting lines in an upwards direction + + + + + Ctrl+Arrow Up + + + Move cursor to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke moves cursor to beginning of previous paragraph + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Up + + + Select to beginning of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to beginning of previous paragraph + + + + + Arrow Down + + + Move cursor down one line + + + + + Shift+Arrow Down + + + Selecting lines in a downward direction + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Arrow Down + + + Move cursor to beginning of next paragraph. + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Down + + + Select to end of paragraph. Next keystroke extends selection to end of next paragraph + + + + + Command+Arrow Left +Home + + + Go to beginning of line + + + + + Command+Arrow Left +Home+Shift + + + Go and select to the beginning of a line + + + + + Command+Arrow Right +End + + + Go to end of line + + + + + Command+Arrow Right +End+Shift + + + Go and select to end of line + + + + + Command+Arrow Up +Ctrl+Home + + + Go to start of document + + + + + Command+Arrow Up +Ctrl+Home+Shift + + + Go and select text to start of document + + + + + Command+Arrow Down +Ctrl+End + + + Go to end of document + + + + + Command+Arrow Down +Ctrl+End+Shift + + + Go and select text to end of document + + + + + Command +Ctrl+PageUp + + + Switch cursor between text and header + + + + + Command +Ctrl+PageDown + + + Switch cursor between text and footer + + + + + Insert + + + Insert mode on/off + + + + + PageUp + + + Screen page up + + + + + Shift+PageUp + + + Move up screen page with selection + + + + + PageDown + + + Move down screen page + + + + + Shift+PageDown + + + Move down screen page with selection + + + + + Option+Fn+Backspace +Ctrl+Del + + + Delete text to end of word + + + + + Option +Ctrl+Backspace + + + Delete text to beginning of word + In a list: delete an empty paragraph in front of the current paragraph + + + + + Command+Fn+Backspace +Ctrl+Del+Shift + + + Delete text to end of sentence + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Backspace + + + Delete text to beginning of sentence + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Tab + + + Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab + + + Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V + + + Paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. + + + + + CommandCtrl + double-click or CommandCtrl + Shift + F10 + + + Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator, Styles window, or other windows + + +
+headings; switching levels by keyboard + paragraphs; moving by keyboard + +

Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs, List Paragraphs and Heading Levels

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Up ArrowUFI: see sw-features "Ctrl + Up/Down accelerators added to move paragraphs". See now also i31697 + + + Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow + + + Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. + + + + + Tab + + + With the cursor positioned in front of a heading or list paragraph: The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 1-9) is moved down one level in the outline. For list paragraphs, the list level is moved down one level. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 2-10) is moved up one level in the outline. For list paragraphs, the list level is moved up one level. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + +tab stops; before headings + headings; starting with tab stops + + With the cursor placed anywhere in a heading or list paragraph: Increases the alignment for all headings. For list paragraphs, increases the alignment for all paragraphs in the same list. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab + + + With the cursor placed anywhere in a heading or list paragraph: Decreases the alignment for all headings. For list paragraphs, decreases the alignment for all paragraphs in the same list. + + +
+ To insert a tab at the beginning of a heading or list paragraph, use the Numbering followed by option in the Position tab in the Chapter Numbering or Bullets and Numbering dialog. Alternatively, a tab can be copied and then pasted at the beginning. +

Shortcut Keys for Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + Command +Ctrl+A + + + If the active cell is empty: selects the whole table. Otherwise: selects the contents of the active cell. Pressing again selects the entire table. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Home + + + If the active cell is empty: goes to the beginning of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to beginning of the active cell, second press goes to beginning of the current table, third press goes to beginning of document. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+End + + + If the active cell is empty: goes to the end of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to the end of the active cell, second press goes to the end of the current table, third press goes to the end of the document. + + + + + Command +Ctrl+Tab + + + Inserts a tab stop (only in tables). Depending on the Window Manager in use, Option +Alt+Tab may be used instead. + + + + + Option +Alt+Arrow Keys + + + Increases/decreases the size of the column/row on the right/bottom cell edgeUFI: deleted two rows, see i31697 + + + + + Option +Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys + + + Increase/decrease the size of the column/row on the left/top cell edge + + + + + Option+Command +Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys + + + Like Option +Alt, but only the active cell is modified + + + + + Option+Command +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys + + + Like Option +Alt, but only the active cell is modified + + + + +removing; cell protection in text documents + +Command +Ctrl+Shift+T + + + Removes cell protection from all selected tables. If no table is selected, then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Del + + + If no whole cell is selected, the text from the cursor to the end of the current sentence is deleted. If the cursor is at the end of a cell, and no whole cell is selected, the contents of the next cell are deleted. + If no whole cell is selected and the cursor is at the end of the table, the paragraph following the table will be deleted, unless it is the last paragraph in the document. + If one or more cells are selected, the whole rows containing the selection will be deleted. If all rows are selected completely or partially, the entire table will be deleted. + + +
+

Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames, Graphics and Objects

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + Esc + + + Cursor is inside a frame and no text is selected: Escape selects the frame. + Frame is selected: Escape clears the cursor from the frame. + + + + + F2 or Enter or any key that produces a character on screen + + + If a frame is selected: positions the cursor to the end of the text in the frame. If you press any key that produces a character on screen, and the document is in edit mode, the character is appended to the text. + + + + + OptionAlt+Arrow Keys + + + Move object. + + + + + Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys + + + Resizes by moving lower right corner. + + + + + Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Keys + + + Resizes by moving top left corner. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + Selects the anchor of an object (in Edit Points mode). + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bf0970ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + Positioning Objects + /text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp + + + + + + + objects;anchoring options + positioning;objects (guide) + anchors;options + frames;anchoring options + pictures;anchoring options + centering;images on HTML pages + + + +

Positioning Objects

+An object, such as an image or frame, is positioned within a document using an anchor attached to another element. +An anchor determines the reference point for an object. The reference point could be the page or frame where the object is, a paragraph, or even a character. An object always has an anchor. +An anchor moves with the element it is attached to as the document is edited. An object retains its position relative to the reference point determined by its anchor, such that, whenever the reference point moves or changes, the object moves relative to it. +The following anchoring options are available: + + + + + Anchoring + + + Effect + + + + + As character + + + Anchors the selected object as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected object is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the object is increased. + To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph. + + + + + To character + + + Anchors the selected object to the paragraph that contains the character to which the anchor is attached. The reference point for the object is the start of the paragraph that contains the character. + For example, if you split the paragraph at a point before the anchor, the reference point moves to the start of the new paragraph and the object moves relative to that point. If you join the paragraph to the one before it, the reference point moves to the start of the combined paragraph and the object moves to a position relative to that. + + + + + To paragraph + + + Anchors the selected object to the current paragraph. + + + + + To page + + + Anchors the selected object to the current page. + + + + + To frame + + + Anchors the selected object to the surrounding frame. + + +
+ Objects can only be positioned on the page where their anchor is located. +
+

Moving an Anchor

+
+When you insert a shape, textbox, OLE object, image, or frame in your document, an anchor icon appears where the object is anchored. You can move an anchor or, keeping other object constraints in mind, position an object relative to the anchor's reference point by dragging the object. +
+
+
+

Changing an Anchor

+To change the anchoring options of an object, right-click the object, and then choose an option from the Anchor submenu. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..839cf20b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp + + + + + + +headings;rearranging +rearranging headings +moving;headings +demoting heading levels +promoting heading levels +Navigator;heading levels and chapters +arranging;headings +outlines;arranging chapters + + +

Arranging Chapters in the Navigator

+You can move headings and subordinate text up and down in a document text by using the Navigator. You can also promote and demote heading levels. To use this feature, format the headings in your document with one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. To use a custom paragraph style for a heading, choose Tools - Chapter Numbering, select the style in the Paragraph Style box, and then double-click a number in the Levels list. +To quickly move the text cursor to a heading in the document, double-click the heading in the Navigator list. +To dock the Navigator, drag the title bar to the edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, double-click its frame while holding the CommandCtrl key. + +

To Move a Heading Up or Down in the Document

+Ensure that all heading levels are shown in the Navigator. By default all levels are shown. See steps below how to change the heading levels that are shown. + + + + On the Standard Bar, click the Navigator icon Icon navigator to open the Navigator. + + + On the Navigator, click the Content Navigation View icon Icon Content Navigation View. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Drag a heading to a new location in the Navigator list. + + + Click a heading in the Navigator list, and then click the Promote Chapter Icon promote or Demote Chapter icon Icon demote. + + +To move the heading without the subordinate text, hold down CommandCtrl while you drag or click the Promote Chapter or Demote Chapter icons. + +

To Promote or Demote the Level of a Heading

+ + + + Select the heading in the Navigator list. + + + Click the Promote Level Icon promote level or Demote Level icon Icon demote level. + + + +

To Change the Number of Heading Levels That Are Displayed

+Click the Heading Levels Shown icon Icon heading levels, and then select a number from the list. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2994782bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type + /text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp + + + +numbering; lists, while typing + bullet lists;creating while typing + lists;automatic numbering + numbers;lists + automatic bullets/numbers; AutoCorrect function + bullets; using automatically + paragraphs; automatic numbering +MW deleted "applying;"mw deleted "automatic bullets" and changed "automatic numbering;" +Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type + + $[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type. + To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select “Bulleted and numbered lists”. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. + + + The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. + To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type + + + Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). + + + Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. + + + Press Enter again to finish the list. + + + You can start a numbered list with any number. + +
+ + Format - Bullets and Numbering +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d2dbd163 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + Turning Off AutoCorrect + /text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp + + + +turning off automatic correction +text;turning off automatic correction +uppercase;changing to lowercase +capital letters;changing to small letters after periods +quotation marks;changing automatically +words;automatic replacement on/off +lines;automatic drawing on/off +underlining;quick +borders; automatic drawing on/off +automatic changes on/off +changes;automatic +AutoCorrect function;turning off + + +

Turning Off AutoCorrect +

+ By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. + + + To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command +Ctrl+Z. + + + To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + + +

To Remove a Word from the AutoCorrect List

+ + + + + + Click the Replace tab. + + + In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. + + + Click Delete. + + +

To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks

+ + + + + + Click the Localized Options tab + + + Clear the "Replace" check box(es). + + +

To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence

+ + + + + + Click the Options tab. + + + Clear the "Capitalize first letter of every sentence" check box. + + +

To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters

+ $[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # + + + + + + Click the Options tab. + + + Clear the "Apply border" check box. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48ceed5fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Automatically Check Spelling + /text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp + + + +spellcheck;Automatic Spell Checking on/off + automatic spellcheck + checking spelling;while typing + words;disabling spellcheck +MW deleted "text;" +
+

Automatic Check Spelling

+ %PRODUCTNAME can automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelled words with a red wavy line. +
+

To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type

+ + + Choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. + + + Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. + + + If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Replace tab. + You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. +

To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck

+ + + Select the words that you want to exclude. + + + Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu. + + + Choose "None (Do not check spelling)". + + + + Creating a new dictionary. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdc39d041 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List + /text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions + exceptions; AutoCorrect function + abbreviations + capital letters;avoiding after specific abbreviations +MW added "capital letters;..." +Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List + + You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Exceptions tab. + + + Do one of the following: + Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. + Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. + + + To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command +Ctrl+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..352daf5be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + Using AutoText + /text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp + + + + + + + AutoText + networks and AutoText directories + lists;AutoText shortcuts + printing;AutoText shortcuts + inserting;text blocks + text blocks + blocks of text + + + + + +Using AutoText +In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. + +To Create an AutoText Entry + + + + Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. + + + Choose Tools - AutoText. + + + Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. + + + Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. + + + Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + + + Click the Close button. + + + +To Insert an AutoText Entry + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. + + + Choose Tools - AutoText. + + + Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click Insert. + + +You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. +To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type fn, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type dt, and then press F3. + +To Print a List of AutoText Entries + + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + + + In the Macro from tree control, select Application Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText. + + + Select "Main" in the Existing macros in: AutoText list and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. + + + Choose File - Print. + + + +Using AutoText in Network Installations +You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. +For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. +The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration. +Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. + +
+Tools - AutoText +Word Completion +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8b6b5675 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics + /text/swriter/guide/background.xhp + + + +backgrounds;text objects +words;backgrounds +paragraphs; backgrounds +text;backgrounds +tables; backgrounds +cells; backgrounds +backgrounds;selecting +MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries +

Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +

MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. +

To Apply a Background To Text Characters

+ + + Select the characters. + + + Choose Format - Character. + + + Click the Highlighting tab, select the background color. + + +

To Apply a Background To a Paragraph

+ + + Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph. + + + On the Area tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + + To select an object in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key and click the object. Alternatively, use the Navigator to select the object. +

To Apply a Background To All or Part of a Table

+ + + Place the cursor in the table in your text document. + + + Choose Table - Properties. + + + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + + In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. + + + You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts. + To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and use the Table Cell Background Color button dropdown on the Table toolbar. + To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph and then use the Background Color dropdown button on the Formatting toolbar. +
+ + + + +Character Highlighting Color icon + Background tab page + Watermarks + Page Backgrounds as Page Styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d536fa3c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Borders for Characters + /text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp + + + + +characters;defining borders + borders; for characters + frames; around characters + defining;character borders + +Defining Borders for Characters + + If two adjacent text ranges' all border properties are identical (same style, width, color, padding and shadow), then those two ranges will be considered to be part of the same border group and rendered within the same border in the document. + To Set a Predefined Border Style + + + Select the range of characters around which you want to add a border. + + + Choose Format - Character - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the selected characters in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + To Set a Customized Border Style + + + Select the range of characters around which you want to add a border. + + + Choose Format - Character - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the selected characters in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b0d8bcb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Borders for Objects + /text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp + + + +objects; defining borders + borders; for objects + frames; around objects + charts;borders + pictures;borders + OLE objects;borders + defining;object borders +MW deleted "adding;" +

Defining Borders for Objects +

+ In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected. +

To Set a Predefined Border Style

+ + + Select the object for which you want to define a border. + + + Click the Borders icon on the OLE Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. + + + Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. + + +

To Set a Customized Border Style

+ + + Select the object for which you want to define a border. + + + Choose Format - (object name) – Borders.
Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdf0b96ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Borders for Pages + /text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp + + + +pages;defining borders + borders; for pages + frames; around pages + defining;page borders +MW deleted "adding;" +Defining Borders for Pages + + In Writer, you define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. + To Set a Predefined Border Style + + + Choose Format - Page - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + To Set a Customized Border Style + + + Choose Format - Page - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..370f56243 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ + + + + + + + + + User Defined Borders in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp + + + +borders;for text tables + cells;borders in text tables + defining;table borders in Writer + frames;around text tables + tables;defining borders +MW changed "text tables;" to "tables;" +

User Defined Borders in Text Documents +

+ You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts. + + + Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table. + + + Choose Table - Properties. + + + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + + + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + + + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. +

Selection of cells

+ Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. + + + + Selection + + + Line arrangement area + + + + + One cell selected in a table that has more than one cells, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected + + + +one cell border + + + + + + A one cell table, the cell is selected + + + +one selected cell border + + + + + + Cells in a column selected + + + +column selected border + + + + + + Cells in a row selected + + + +row selected border + + + + + + A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected + + + +block selected border + + + +
+ +

Default settings

+ Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + + + The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. + + + The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color. + + + The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed. + + +

Examples

+ Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Table - Properties - Borders tab. + +default icons for borders + + + + Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines. + + + Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines. + + + Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed. + + + Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. +

User defined settings

+ In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. + + + + Line types + + + Image + + + Meaning + + + + + A black line + + + +solid line for border + + + + A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style. + + + + + A gray line + + + +gray line for border + + + + A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position. + + + + + A white line + + + +white line for border + + + + A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed. + + +
+ +

Examples

+ + + Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Properties - Borders. + + + Select a thick line style. + + + To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line. + + + +setting thick lower border + + All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. + All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0352f5884 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Calculating in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp + + + + + + + calculating; in text + formulas; calculating in text + references;in Writer tables + =;in Writer tables + tables;starting cell with = + +mw deleted "formula bar in text" + +

Calculating in Text Documents

+You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =. + + + Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, =10000/12, and then press Enter. + + +You can also click the Formula icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. +To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. +

Cell Entries that Start with Equal Sign (=)

+To make a table cell entry that starts with = sign, first enter a space, then the = sign, and then delete the space. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b9bc0a0a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp + + + +pasting;results of formulas + clipboard;calculating in text + formulas;pasting results in text documents + + Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document + + If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. + + + Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. + + + Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command +Ctrl+Plus Sign (+). + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or press Command +Ctrl+V.
The selected formula is replaced by the result. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b3d77b11 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating Cell Totals in Tables + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp + + + +calculating;sums in text tables + totals in text tables + tables;calculating sums + cells;calculating sums + table cells;calculating sums + sums of table cell series +mw deleted "text tables;" +Calculating the Sum of a Series of Table Cells + + + + Choose Table - Insert Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. + + + Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. + + + Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Bar.
The + Formula Bar appears with the entry "=sum". + + + Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. + + + Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. + + + If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. + Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ca20390b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp + + + + + + + formulas; complex formulas in text + calculating;formulas/mean values + +mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry + +Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents +You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. +For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. + + + Click the Formula icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list. + + + Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). + + + Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. + + +To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e63c3172 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp + + + +calculating;in text tables + tables; performing calculations in +MW reduced "text tables;" to "tables;" +Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table + + You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table. + + + Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell. + + + Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table. + + + Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2. + + + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + + + Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + + + Press Enter. + + + If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74d08c1df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating Across Tables + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp + + + +calculating; across multiple text tables + tables;calculating across +mw changed "text tables;" to "tables;" +Calculating Across Tables + + You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document. + + + Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables. + + + Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables. + + + Press F2. + + + In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, =SUM. + + + Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. + + + Press Enter. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46047d24f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Using Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp + + + + + + + inserting; captions + captions; inserting and editing + editing;captions + objects; captioning + tables; labeling + charts; labeling + frames; labeling + draw objects; inserting captions + legends, see also captions + +mw deleted "adding;" + + +Using Captions +In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects. +You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions. +When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text. +To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9. +To define a caption proceed as follows: + + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category box, for example Figure. + + +You can edit caption text directly in the document. +A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. +$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b39002211 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp + + + +captions; adding chapter numbers + objects; captioning automatically + numbering; captions + automatic numbering;of objects + chapter numbers in captions + inserting;chapter numbers in captions + +

Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions +

+ You can include chapter numbers in captions. + Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering scheme in the Numbering box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box. + + + Click Options. + + + In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. + + + Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separator box, and then click OK. + + + In the Caption dialog, click OK. + + + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. +
+ + AutoCaption dialog + Chapter numbering +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14509d0f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page + /text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp + + + + + + + headers; inserting + footers; inserting + page styles; changing from selection + new page styles from selection + +mw deleted "creating;" + +Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page +You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it. +For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. + + + + Open a new text document, choose View - Styles, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + Click the Styles actions icon and select New Style from Selection from the submenu. + + + Type a name for the page in the Style name box, and then click OK. + + + Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. + + + Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. + + + Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. + + + In the Type area, select Page break and then select “Default Page Style” from the Style box. + + + Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f43c2e63a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Chapter Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp + + + + + + + outlines;numbering + chapters;numbering + deleting;heading numbers + chapter numbering + headings; numbering/paragraph styles + numbering;headings + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entry + +

Chapter Numbering

+You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the chapter hierarchy. + +

To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + In the Paragraph style box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to. + + + In the Number box, select the numbering scheme that you want to use, and then click OK. + + + +

To Remove Automatic Chapter Numbering From a Heading Paragraph

+ + + + Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. + + + Press the Backspace key to delete the number. + + +Press Shift+Backspace with the cursor at the beginning of the heading to return the number. +

To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. + + + Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a064b4ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + Conditional Text + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp + + + + + + + matching conditional text in fields + if-then queries as fields + conditional text; setting up + text; conditional text + defining;conditions + + + +Conditional Text +You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. +Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. + +To Define a Conditional Variable +The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. + + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + Click "Set variable" in the Type list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example Reminder. + + + Click "Text" in the Format list. + + + Enter 1 in the Value box, and then click Insert.
The Format list now displays a "General" format. + + + +To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text +The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. + + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. + The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. + + + + + + Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + +To Display the Conditional Text +In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. + + + + Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. + + + Replace the number in the Value box with 3, and then click Close. + + + If the field does not automatically update, press F9. + + + +
+ + + +List of conditional operators +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3618e4059 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Conditional Text for Page Counts + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp + + + + + + + page counts + conditional text;page counts + + + +Conditional Text for Page Counts +You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. + + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. + + + Choose Insert - Field - Page Count, and then enter a space. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + Type Page > 1 in the Condition box. + + + Type Pages in the Then box. + + + Type Page in the Else box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df71cac2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + /text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp + + + + + + + user-defined dictionaries; removing words from + custom dictionaries; removing words from + deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." + +Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. + + + Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined list, and then click Edit. + + + Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d99a25baf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Moving and Copying Text in Documents + /text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp + + + +sections;moving and copying + moving; text sections + copying; text sections + pasting;cut/copied text sections + mouse;moving and copying text +mw deleted "text sections;" +Moving and Copying Text in Documents + + + + Select the text that you want to move or copy. + + + Do one of the following: + To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box.
+Mouse cursor moving data + + To copy the selected text, hold down Command +Ctrl while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to include a plus sign (+).
+Mouse cursor copying data + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30523652d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + /text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp + + + + + + + page styles; left and right pages + blank pages with alternating page styles + empty page with alternating page styles + pages; left and right pages + formatting; even/odd pages + title pages; page styles + First Page page style + Left Page page style + right pages + even/odd pages;formatting + +MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries. + +Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + + + + + Icon + + + $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. + + +
+ + +To Set Up Alternating Page Styles + + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Organizer tab. + + + Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. + + + Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles window. + + +To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. +To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. +If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. + +To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages +If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + + Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. + + + +
+ + +Insert Break dialog +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..544c8a474 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Converting a Field into Text + /text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp + + + +fields; converting into text + converting;fields, into text + replacing;fields, by text + changing;fields, into text + +Converting a Field into Text + + You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. + + + Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. + + + Choose Edit - Paste Special. + + + Click "Unformatted text" in the + Selection list, and then click + OK. + + + + + Paste Special + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca839452c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + About Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp + + + +fields;updating/viewing + updating;fields + Help tips;fields + properties;fields + disabling;field highlighting + changing;field shadings + viewing;fields +mw changed "fields;..." +About Fields + + Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. + Viewing Fields + Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. + To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. + To change the color of field shadings, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box. + Field Properties + Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values. + The following field types execute an action when you click the field: + + + + Field Type + + + Property + + + + + Placeholder + + + Opens a dialog to insert the object corresponding to the placeholder, except for text placeholders. For text placeholders, click on the placeholder and type over it. + + + + + Insert Reference + + + Moves the mouse pointer to the reference. + + + + + Run macro + + + Runs a macro. + + + + + Input Field + + + Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field. + + +
+ + Updating Fields + To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. + To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. + Placeholders are not updated. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798e32e51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field + /text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp + + + + + + + inserting;date fields + dates;inserting + date fields;fixed/variable + fixed dates + variable dates + + + +Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field +You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. + + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Document tab. + + + Click “Date” in the Type list and do one of the following: + To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the Select list. + To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the Select list. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2215d06b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Input Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp + + + + + + + text; input fields + fields; input fields in text + input fields in text + inserting;input fields + +MW deleted "adding;" + +Adding Input Fields +An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. + + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click “Input field”in the Type list. + + + Click Insert and type the text for the variable. + + + Click OK. + + +To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F9. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf74c016e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + + + + + + + Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions + /text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp + + + + + + + fields; user data + user data; querying + conditions; user data fields + hiding;text, from specific users + text; hiding from specific users, with conditions + user variables in conditions/fields + + + +Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions +You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators: + + + + + Operator + + + Meaning + + + + + == or EQ + + + equals + + + + + != or NEQ + + + is not equal to + + +
+ +If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user. + + + + Select the text in the document that you want to hide. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide area, select the Hide check box. + + + In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. + + + Click Insert and then save the document. + + +The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. +The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field: + + + + + User variables + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip Code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + Email address + + + + + user_state + + + State + + +
+ + +
+ + + +List of operators +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84c5b609c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + + Finding and Replacing in Writer + /text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp + + + +
+finding; text/text formats/styles/objects + replacing; text and text formats + styles;finding + searching, see also finding + text formats; finding + formats; finding and replacing + searching; formats + objects;finding by Navigator + Asian languages;search options +3. mw added 2 index entries and changed "finding;"2. mw copied 6 index entries from shared/01/02100300.xhp. Then made one entry of two "finding;" entries, one entry of two "replacing;" entries and one entry of two "formats;" entries1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and then made one entry of two "finding;" entries. +Finding and Replacing in Writer + + In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text. +
+ The Find & Replace dialog + To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog. + To Find Text + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Enter the text to find in the Find text box. + + + Either click Find Next or Find All. + + + When you click Find Next, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find Next again to advance to the next found text. + If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. + Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. + When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once. + To Replace Text + Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Enter the text to search in the Find text box. + + + Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. + + + Either click Replace or Replace All. + + + When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Find box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace text box. Click Find Next to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. + When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. + To Find Styles + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Click Other options to expand the dialog. + + + Check Paragraph Styles.
The Find text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document. + + + Select the style to search for, then click Find Next or Find All. + + + To Find Formats + You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. + Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Click the Format button. + + + + + Click Find Next or Find All. + + + More options + The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. + Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the Similarities button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) + When you have enabled Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. + The Navigator + The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. + Choose View - Navigator to open the Navigator window. + Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. + Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. + Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31cfd6c25 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages + /text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp + + + + + + + pages; continuation pages + next page number in footers + continuation pages + page numbers; continuation pages + + +

Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages

+You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field. +The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. + + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Field - More Fields. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. + + + Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. + + + Click a numbering scheme in the Format list. + If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. + + + Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4ad56f9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting Page Numbers in Footers + /text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp + + + +footers; with page numbers + pages; numbers and count of + page numbers; footers + numbering;pages + +Inserting Page Numbers in Footers + + You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12" + To Insert a Page Number + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Choose Insert - Field - Page Number. + + + If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text. + To Additionally Add a Page Count + + + Click in front of the page number field, type Page and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type of and enter another space. + + + Choose Insert - Field - Page Count. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1994a5c79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp + + + + + + + endnotes;inserting and editing + inserting;footnotes/endnotes + deleting;footnotes + editing;footnotes/endnotes + organizing;footnotes + footnotes; inserting and editing + + +

Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes

+Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes. + +

To Insert a Footnote or Endnote

+ + + + Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. + + + Choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Footnote or Endnote. + + + In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the Choose button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. + + + In the Type area, select Footnote or Endnote. + + + Click OK. + + + Type the note. + + + + + + + Icon + + + You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. + + +
+ + + + + +Insert Endnote Icon + + + + You can insert endnotes directly by clicking the Insert Endnote icon on the Standard or Insert toolbar or choose Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Endnote. + + +
+ + +

To Edit a Footnote or Endnote

+ + + + The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. + + + + + To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text, or press CommandCtrl+Shift+PageDown. + + + To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press Command+T +F11 to open the Styles window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + + + To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. + + + + + To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. + + + To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes. + + + To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. + + + To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. + +Shortcut keys can be made to insert, edit, and navigate to footnotes and endnotes. Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab and enter note in the Functions box to see possibilities. +
+ + +Making a Shortcut Key +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1796acad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Spacing Between Footnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp + + + + + + + spacing; endnotes/footnotes + endnotes; spacing + footnotes; spacing + borders;for footnotes/endnotes + lines;footnotes/endnotes + + + +Spacing Between Footnotes +If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style. + + + + Click in a footnote or endnote. + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. + + + Click the Borders tab. + + + In the Default area, click the Set Top and Bottom Borders Only icon. + + + In the Line area, click a line in the Style list. + + + Select "White" in the Color box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. + + + In the Padding area, clear the Synchronize check box. + + + Enter a value in the Top and Bottom boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + + +Format - Paragraph - Borders + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..894d9ffaf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + Creating a Form Letter + /text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp + + + +serial letters + form letters + mail merge + letters; creating form letters + wizards;form letters +mw added "serial letters" +Creating a Form Letter + + + To create a form letter, you need a text document that contains fields for address data, and an address database. Then you combine or merge the address data and the text document to either print the letters or send them by email. + If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the email. + The Mail Merge Wizard helps you to create form letters. + To create a form letter + + + Choose Tools - Mail Merge Wizard. + You see the Mail Merge Wizard dialog. The following is an example of one of many possible ways to navigate the wizard's pages: + + + Select Start from a template, and click the Browse button. + You see the New dialog. + + + Select Business Correspondence in the left list, and then "Modern" business letter in the right list. Click OK to close the Templates dialog, and click Next in the wizard. + + + Select Letter and click Next. + + + On the next step of the wizard, click the Select Address List button to check that you are using the correct address list. If you want to use an address block, select an address block type, match the data fields if necessary, and click Next. + + + Next follows the Create a salutation step. Deselect the Insert personalized salutation box. Under General salutation, select the salutation that you want on top of all letters. + + + If you want to place mail merge fields anywhere else in the document select the corresponding column in your address data source and then drag and drop the column header into the document where you would like the field to be. Be sure to select the entire column. + + + Click Next and finally Finish to create the mail merge. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a0a73d75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + + Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp + + + +master documents;properties + subdocuments;properties + central documents + subsidiary documents + documents; master documents and subdocuments + styles;master documents +Mw made "master documents" and "subdocuments" a two level entry, deleted "references;" and "bookmarks;" and added a new entry and shifted "Navigator;" and "indexes;" to the file globaldoc_howtos.xhp +Master Documents and Subdocuments +MW: This file was split into globaldoc.xhp (concepts) and globaldoc_howtos.xhp (procedures) +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + Characteristics of Master Documents + + + When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. + + + You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. + + + Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document. + + + When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. + + + Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document. + + + When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. + Example of Using Styles + A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. + When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. + In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. + To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document. +
+ + + Navigator in master mode +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cae87b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ + + + + + + + Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp + + + + + + + Navigator;master documents + master documents;creating/editing/exporting + subdocuments;creating/editing/removing + removing;subdocuments + indexes; master documents + +MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries + +Working with Master Documents and SubdocumentsMW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. + +To Create a Master Document + + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Choose File - New - Master Document. + + + Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. + + + + + If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments. + + + In the Navigator for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the Insert icon, and do one of the following: + + + + + + To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click Open. + + + To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. + + + To insert some text between subdocuments, choose Text. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + + Choose File - Save. + + + +To Edit a Master Document +Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. + + + + To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator. + + + + + To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. + + + + + To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + + To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up icon. + + + + + To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. + + + + + + Icon + + + To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. + + +
+ +When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. + +To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page + + + + Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". + + + In the master document, choose View - Styles, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Breaks area, select Insert, and then select “Page”in the Type box. + + + If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Export a Master Document + + + + Choose File - Export. + + + In the Save as type list, select a text document file format and click Save. + + +The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. + +
+ + +Navigator in master mode +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef1b4791b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + About Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp + + + + + + + headers;about + footers;about + HTML documents; headers and footers + + +

About Headers and Footers

+Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. +The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. + + + + To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + + + You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer tab, and then select Header on or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. + + + + + To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. + + +

Headers and Footers in HTML Documents

+Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. + +
+ + + + +Page Styles +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..385887ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Different Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp + + + + + + + headers;defining for left and right pages + footers;defining for left and right pages + page styles; changing + defining; headers/footers + mirrored page layout + + + +Defining Different Headers and Footers +You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. +You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the Page tab, and in the Layout settings area, choose “Mirrored” in the Page layout box. +For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. + + + + Open a new text document. + + + Choose View - Styles and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles sidebar deck. + + + Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + + Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style box, select "Left Page". + + + Click OK. + + + In the Styles window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + + Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style box, select "Right Page". + + + Click OK. + + + Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. + + + Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7460d4145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp + + + + + + + running titles in headers + floating titles in headers + headers; chapter information + chapter names in headers + names; chapter names in headers + + +

Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer

+Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the chapter numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles. + +

To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering. + + + In the Style box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1". + + + Select the numbering scheme for the chapter titles in the Number box, for example, "1,2,3...". + + + Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the Before box. + + + Enter a space in the After box. + + + Click OK. + + + +

To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer

+ + + + Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header or Insert - Header and Footer - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + Click in the header or footer. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Document tab. + + + + + + Click "Chapter" in the Type list and "Chapter number and name" in the Format list. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + +The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. +
+ + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..797c227b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Headers or Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp + + + + + + + inserting;lines under headers/above footers + lines; under headers/above footers + headers;formatting + footers;formatting + shadows;headers/footers + borders;for headers/footers + +MW changed "inserting;" + +Formatting Headers or Footers +You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer. + + + + Choose Format - Page and select the Header or Footer tab. + + + Set the spacing options that you want to use. + + + To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click More. The Border/Background dialog opens. + + + + + + To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the Line arrangement area. Click a line style in the Style box. + + + To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the Synchronize box, and then enter a value in the Bottom box. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8bddbe45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Hiding Text + /text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp + + + +text; hiding + sections;hiding + paragraphs;hiding + hiding;text, with conditions + variables;for hiding text +mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhpMW added "variables;" +

Hiding Text

+ You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. + Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. +

To Create a Variable

+ + + Click in your document and choose Insert - Field - More Fields. + + + Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. + + + Click "General" in the Format list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, Hide. + + + Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, 1. + + + To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + +

To Hide Text

+ + + Click in the document where you want to add the text. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. + + + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + +

To Hide a Paragraph

+ + + Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. + + + Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Click Insert and Close. + + + You must enable this feature by removing the check mark Hidden Paragraphs in the dialog %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. +

To Hide a Section

+ + + Select the text that you want to hide in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. + + + Click Insert. + + +
+ + + Displaying Hidden Text + Creating Non-printing Text + Insert - Field - More Fields + Insert - Section + List of Operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01244aa96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Displaying Hidden Text + /text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp + + + +hidden text; displaying + displaying;hidden text +MW copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp +

Displaying Hidden Text +

MW created this guide from splitting hidden_text.xhp +If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: + + + Check the Hidden Paragraphs box in the dialog %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View. + + + + + Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable. + + + Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement. + + +
+ Hiding Text + + List of Operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4087575b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp + + + + + + + hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator + inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator + cross-references; inserting with Navigator + Navigator;inserting hyperlinks + +mw deleted "adding;" + +Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator +You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other %PRODUCTNAME documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in %PRODUCTNAME, you are taken to the cross-referenced item. + + + + Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. + + + On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. + + + Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink is selected. + + + In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink. + + + Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document. + + +The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bda3fe52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words + /text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp + + + +hyphenation;preventing for specific words + words;wrapping/not wrapping in text + switching off;hyphenation for specific words + +

Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words +

MW created this guide from splitting using_hyphen.xhp +If your text is automatically hyphenated and certain hyphenated words look ugly, or if you want specific words never to be hyphenated you can switch off hyphenation for those words: + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + + + + Select a dictionary in the User-defined dictionary list, and then click Edit. + If the list is empty, click New to create a dictionary. + + + In the Word box, type the word you want to exclude from hyphenation, followed by an equal sign (=), for example, "pretentious=". + + + Click New, and then click Close. + + + To quickly exclude a word from hyphenation, select the word, choose Format - Character, click the Font tab, and select "None" in the Language box. + Some words contain special characters that %PRODUCTNAME treats as a hyphen. If you do not want such words to be hyphenated, you can insert a special code that prevents hyphenation at the position where the special code is inserted. Proceed as follows: + + + Position the cursor at the place where no hyphenation should occur. + + + Choose Insert - Formatting Mark - Word Joiner. + The inserted formatting mark will be shown in gray. To remove it, simply place the cursor over the formatting mark and press the Del key. + + +
+ + Text Flow +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c996dde28 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + Indenting Paragraphs + /text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp + + + +formatting; indenting paragraphs + indents;in text + paragraphs; indents + hanging indents in paragraphs + right indents in paragraphs + lines of text; indents + changing;indents +mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp" +

Indenting Paragraphs +

see i66307 + You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also set indents using the ruler. + + + Right-click a paragraph and choose Paragraph - Edit Style - Indents & Spacing tab to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style. + + + You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. +

Positioning indents

+ Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. +To change the measurement units, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the Before text indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. +

Hanging indents

+ For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for Before text and a negative value for First line. +The Hanging Indent icon is found in the Paragraph section of the Properties sidebar. Click on this icon to switch the values of Before text and First line. This enables you to toggle a paragraph between an indented first line and a hanging indent. +To create a hanging indent: Enter a first line indent where you want the indent to start, then click the Hanging Indent icon to create the hanging indent. + + + + +Hanging Indent Icon + + + Hanging Indent Icon + + +
+ The Hanging Indent command can be added as a button to a toolbar, an item in a menu or context menu, or a shortcut key. +
+ + + Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11db2b3be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; editing or deleting entries + tables of contents; editing or deleting entries + deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents + editing;table/index entries + + + +Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries +Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose View and ensure that Field Shadings is selected. + + + + Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. + + + Choose Edit - Reference - Index Entry..., and do one of the following: + + + + + + To change the entry, enter different text in the Entry box. + + + To remove the entry, click Delete. + +To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b19250d19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp + + + +indexes; editing/updating/deleting + tables of contents; editing and deleting + updating;indexes/tables of contents + editing;indexes/tables of contents + deleting;indexes/tables of contents + +Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents + + + + Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. + If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select Enable cursor in the Protected Areas section. + + + Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. + + + You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index or Table of Contents, click Type tab, and then clear the Protected against manual changes check box. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7841d0a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; defining entries in + tables of contents; defining entries in + entries; defining in indexes/tables of contents + + + +

Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries

+ +

To Define Index Entries

+ + + + Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry, and do one of the following: + + + + + + To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. + + + To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. + + + To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. + + +

To Define Table of Contents Entries

+The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. + +

To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry

+ + + + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering and click the Numbering tab. + + + Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. + + + In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. + + + Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb4f86377 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp + + + +indexes; formatting + editing; index format + tables of contents; formatting + entries; in tables of contents, as hyperlinks + tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries + hyperlinks; in tables of contents and indexes + formatting;indexes and tables of contents + +Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents + + You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. + To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index or Table of Contents. + + + Click the Styles tab. + + + Click an index level in the Levels list. + + + Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. + + + Click the assign button <. + + + Click OK. + + + To Assign Hyperlinks to Entries in a Table of Contents + You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. + + + Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index or Table of Contents. + + + Click the Entries tab. + + + In the Level list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to. + + + In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. + + + Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. + + + Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All button to apply the formatting to all levels. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fe59a885 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Creating Alphabetical Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp + + + + + + + concordance files;indexes + indexes; alphabetical indexes + alphabetical indexes + + + +Creating Alphabetical Indexes + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + + + On the Type tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. + + + If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. + + + Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. + + + Click OK. + + + To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index or Table of Contents. + + + +Creating a concordance file + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..076aa1f87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Creating a Bibliography + /text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp + + + + + + + indexes;creating bibliographies + databases;creating bibliographies + bibliographies + entries;bibliographies + storing bibliographic information + + + +Creating a Bibliography +A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. + +Storing Bibliographic Information +$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. + +To Store Information in the Bibliography Database + + + + Choose Tools - Bibliography Database + + + Choose Data - Record. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. + + + Close the Bibliography Database window. + + + +To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document + + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry. + + + Select From document content and click New. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box. + + + Select the publication source for the record in the Type box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + In the Insert Bibliography Entry dialog, click Insert, and then Close. + + + + +Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database + + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry. + + + + + + Select From bibliography database. + + + Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + + +
+Bibliography Database + + + + + + + + +Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called Bibus. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..096758bc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + Indexes Covering Several Documents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp + + + +indexes;multiple documents + multiple documents;indexes + merging;indexes + master documents;indexes +MW inserted "master documents;" +Indexes Covering Several Documents + + There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents: + + + Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them. + + + Select each index, choose Insert - Section, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose + Insert - Section, select Link, click the Browse button, and then locate and insert a named index section. + + + Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87d1775e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Creating a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp + + + + + + + tables of contents; creating and updating + updating; tables of contents + + + + + +

Creating a Table of Contents

+ +
+The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. + +

To Insert a Table of Contents

+ + + + Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography, and then click the Type tab. + + + Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles check box in the Create from area, and then click the Assign styles button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. +
+
+%PRODUCTNAME creates the table of contents entries based on the outline level of the paragraph style and the paragraph contents. If the paragraph is empty, it will not be included in the table of contents. To force the empty paragraph to be listed in the table of contents, manually add a space or a non breaking space to the paragraph. Spaces added in the After text box of the Numbering tab in the Chapter Numbering dialog will not work for this purpose, since they are part of the paragraph numbering, not the paragraph contents. +
+

To Update a Table of Contents

+Do one of the following: + + + + Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index or Table of Contents. + + + Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64236a4d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + User-Defined Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; creating user-defined indexes + user-defined indexes + + + +User-Defined Indexes +You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. + +To Create a User-Defined Index + + + + Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry. + + + Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index box. + + + Type a name for the index in the Name box and click OK. + + + Click Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. + + + Click Close. + + + +To Insert a User-Defined Index + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography. + + + On the Type tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type box. + + + + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Additional styles, and then click the Assign styles button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the chapter level for the paragraph style. + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc8411b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page +/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tables;start/end of document +paragraphs;inserting before/after tables +inserting;paragraphs before/after tables + +Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page + +If you want to insert text before a table that is at the top of a page, click in the first cell of the table, in front of any contents of that cell, and then press Enter or OptionAlt+Enter. +To insert text after a table at the end of the document, go to the last cell of the table and press OptionAlt+Enter. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f40136788 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics +/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +text; inserting pictures in +images; inserting in text +inserting; pictures +pictures; inserting options +mw deleted "illustrations;" +Inserting Graphics + +There are several ways to insert a graphic object in a text document. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5778d23aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting a Graphic From a File + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp + + + + +pictures; inserting by dialog +inserting; pictures, by dialog + +

Inserting a Graphic From a File +

+ +By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e4a19b57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp + + + +charts;copying from Calc into Writer + copying; charts from $[officename] Calc + text documents;inserting Calc charts + +Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document + + You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet. + + + Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to. + + + Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy. + + + In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear. + + + Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document. + + + You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..faa7d2892 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress +/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +text; inserting pictures from Draw +pictures; inserting from Draw + +Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress + + + +Open the document where you want to insert the object. + + +Open the Draw or Impress document containing the object that you want to copy. + + +Hold down CommandCtrl and click and hold the object for a moment.see i70967 + + +Drag to the document where you want to insert the object. + +ufi: paragraph removed because I cannot verify: id="par_id3152755" If a hyperlink is attached to the object in the original document, the hyperlink is inserted instead of the object. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66a8f7130 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop +/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +inserting; from Gallery into text +pictures; inserting from Gallery into text +replacing;objects from Gallery + +Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop + +You can drag-and-drop an object from the gallery into a text document, spreadsheet, drawing, or presentation. +To replace a gallery object that you inserted in a document, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a different gallery object onto the object. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..751d644f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting a Scanned Image + /text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp + + + +inserting;scanned images + pictures; scanning + scanning pictures + +Inserting a Scanned Image + + To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. + The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. +The scanner must support the SANE standard. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. + + + Choose Insert - Media - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. + + + Follow the scanning instructions. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d9010382 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Changing the List Level of a List Paragraph +/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp + + + + +tab stops; inserting in lists +numbering; changing the level of +lists;changing levels +levels;changing chapter levels +bullet lists;changing levels +lowering chapter levels +rising chapter levels +changing;chapter levels +promote level;in lists +demote level;in lists + +
+

Changing the List Level of a List Paragraph +

+ + + To move a numbered or bulleted list paragraph down one list level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Tab. + + + To move a numbered or bulleted list paragraph up one list level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press Shift+Tab. + + + To insert a tab between the number or bullet and the paragraph text for all list paragraphs at a given list level, use the Numbering followed by option in the Position tab in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. For an individual list paragraph, a tab can be copied and then pasted at the beginning of the list paragraph. + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f343d4a52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Combining Numbered Lists + /text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp + + + + + + + numbering; combining + merging;numbered lists + joining;numbered lists + lists;combining numbered lists + paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive + + +

Combining Ordered Lists

+You can combine two ordered lists into a single list. + +

To Combine Two Ordered Lists

+ + + + Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Ordered List icon twice. + + + +

To Create a Ordered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs

+ + + + Hold down CommandCtrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. + + + Continue to hold down CommandCtrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Ordered List icon twice. + + +To add selected paragraphs to an existing list, use Format - Lists - Add to List. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd1aeb5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + Going to Specific Bookmark + /text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp + + + +bookmarks; positioning cursor + jumping;to bookmarks + +Going to Specific Bookmark + + To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click +right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. + + Insert Bookmark + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bfce4969 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) + /text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp + + + +keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer + accessibility; $[officename] Writer + +Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) + + + Press the keys Option +Alt+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run a command. For example, press Option +Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then H to insert a hyperlink. + To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. + To Insert Sections + + + Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. + + + Press F6 until the focus is on the + Insert toolbar. + + + Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. + + + Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. + + + Press Enter. + + + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + + + To Insert Text Tables + + + Press F6 until the focus is on the + Standard toolbar. + + + Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. + + + Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. + + + Press Enter. + + + Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d607750f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Using Styles From Another Document or Template + /text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp + + + + + + formatting styles; importing + styles; importing from other files + importing;styles from other files + loading;styles from other files + +

Using Styles From Another Document or Template +

+ You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. + Open the Load Styles dialog box by either + + + Choose Styles - Load Styles or + + + Choose View - Styles or + + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles or Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar deck. + + + Click the arrow next to the Styles actions icon to open the submenu, and choose Load Styles + + + + + Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. + + + Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click Open. + + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feb19e264 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ + + + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer +/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp + + + +$[officename] Writer; instructions +instructions; $[officename] Writer + +

Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer +

+ +

Entering and Formatting Text

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatically Entering and Formatting Text

+ + + + + + + + +

Using Styles, Numbering Pages, Using Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Editing Tables in Text + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Images, Drawings, ClipArt, Fontwork + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Table of Contents, Index + + + + + + + + + + + +Headings, Types of Numbering + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Headers, Footers, Footnotes + + + + + + + +Editing Other Objects in Text + + + + + + + + + +Spelling, Dictionaries, Hyphenation + + + + + + +Form Letters, Labels and Business Cards + + + + + +Working with Documents + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +removed a line + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fba988fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Navigator for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp + + + +Navigator; overview in texts + hyperlinks;jumping to + objects;quickly moving to, within text + frames;jumping to + tables;jumping to + headings;jumping to + pages;jumping to + jumping;to text elements + overviews;Navigator in text documents +MW added "pages;" +Navigator for Text Documents + + The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. + + + To open the Navigator, press F5. + + + To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. + + + + + Navigator + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eed375cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Non-printing Text + /text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp + + + +non-printing text + text; non-printable +mw copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp +Creating Non-printing Text +MW created this guide from hidden_text.xhp +To create text that is not to be printed do the following: + + + Choose Insert - Frame and click OK. + + + Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Options tab. + + + In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ Hiding Text +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e69f6230d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables + /text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp + + + + + numbers; automatic recognition in text tables + tables; number recognition + tables; date formatting + table cells; date formatting + dates;formatting automatically in tables + recognition;numbers + +

Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables +

+ $[officename] can automatically recognize numbers or dates that you enter into a table cell, converting them from text to an appropriate number format. Use Table - Number Format to change the display of the entered value. + + To enable or disable this feature, do one of the following: + + + Choose Table - Number Recognition. + When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the Number Recognition command. + + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number Recognition check box. + + +This feature applies globally to all tables in all documents. When enabled, typing a date or number into a table cell will result in automatic formatting. Enabling and disabling this feature does not change existing data formatting. +
+%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eea42da16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Number Ranges + /text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp + + + + + + + numbering;quotations/similar items + +MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;" + +Defining Number Ranges +You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document. + + + + Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ". + + + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + + + + Click "Number range" in the Type list. + + + Type "Quotation" in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Type a number in the Value box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering. + + + Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the Level box. + + + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..677a66084 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Line Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp + + + + + + line numbers + text; line numbers + paragraphs;line numbers + lines of text; numbering + numbering; lines + numbers; line numbering + marginal numbers on text pages + +

Adding Line Numbers

+ $[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers. + Line numbers are not available in HTML format. + +

To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document

+ + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + +

To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs

+ + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering. + + + Press Command+T + F11 to open the Styles window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. + All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. + + + + + + Click the Outline & List tab. + + + In the Line Numbering area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. + + + Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. + + + Click OK. + + + You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. + +

To Specify the Starting Line Number

+ + + Click in a paragraph. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Outline & List tab. + + + Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + + + Select Restart at the paragraph check box. + + + Enter a line number in the Start with box. + + + Click OK. + + + +
+ Tools - Line Numbering + + Format - Paragraph - Outline & List + Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddf4c84e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Modifying Numbering in an Ordered List + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp + + + + + + + numbering; removing/interrupting + bullet lists; interrupting + lists;removing/interrupting numbering + deleting;numbers in lists + interrupting numbered lists + changing;starting numbers in lists + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...", and deleted "modifying;..." + +

Modifying Numbering in an Ordered List

+You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in an ordered list or change the number that an ordered list starts with. + + +

To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in an Ordered List

+ + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. + + + To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the No List icon on the Formatting Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. + + +

To Change the Number That an Ordered List Starts With

+ + + + Click anywhere in the ordered list. + + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Customize tab. + + + Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + +Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9c6b50ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks + /text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp + + + + + inserting; page breaks + deleting;page breaks + pages; inserting/deleting page breaks + manual page breaks + tables;deleting page breaks before + +

Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks +

+

To Insert a Manual Page Break

+ + + Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. + + + Press CommandCtrl+Enter. + + +

To Delete a Manual Page Break

+ + + Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. + + + Press Backspace. + + +

To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table

+ + + Right-click in the table, and choose Table. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + Clear the Break check box. + + +

To Quickly Switch Between Portrait and Landscape Page Layout

+ + Read the help page Changing Page Orientation to learn more about advanced configurations that can be defined concerning page orientation. + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08909788e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + Changing Page Backgrounds + /text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp + + + + + + + page styles;backgrounds + backgrounds; different pages + changing;page backgrounds + pages;backgrounds + +MW deleted "page backgrounds" + +Changing Page Background +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. + +
+ +To Change the Page Background + + + + Choose View - Styles (Command+T)(F11). + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + + + + + + To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". + + + To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. + + + + + Click the Area tab. + + + Select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ +To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + + Choose View - Styles (Command+T)(F11). + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. + + + +To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Style box, select a page style that uses the page background. + + + + + + To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". + + + To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. + If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. + + + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e10d00314 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + Page Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp + + + +page numbers;inserting/defining/formatting + page styles;page numbering + starting page numbers + formatting;page numbers + defining;starting page numbers + inserting;page numbers + styles;page numbers +mw inserted six index entriesmw added "styles;" +Page Numbers + + In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. + To Insert Page Numbers + Choose Insert - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. + If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field Names (Command+F9Ctrl+F9). + However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. + Choose Insert - Header and Footer - Header - (name of page style) or Insert - Header and Footer - Footer - (name of page style) to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style. + To Start With a Defined Page Number + Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12. + + + Click into the first paragraph of your document. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow tab. + + + In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. + + + The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. +

To Select the Page Number Format

+ You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. + + + Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. + + + Select a number format and click OK. + + +

Using Different Page Number Formats in Headers and Footers

+ You need some pages with the roman numbering format, followed by the remaining pages in another format. + In Writer, you will need different page styles. The first page style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following page style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look. + Both page styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks. + + + An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style". + For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default Page Style" as the next style. To see this, you may press Command+TF11 to open the Styles window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the "First Page" entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "Next style". + + + A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. + If you just press Command+EnterCtrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. + If you choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. + + + It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: + To Apply a Different Page Style to the First Page + + + Click into the first page of your document. + + + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11). + + + In the Styles window, click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the "First Page" style. + + + Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default Page Style". + You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default Page Style" only, or insert footers in both page styles, but with differently formatted page number fields. + To Apply a Manually Inserted Page Style Change + + + Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied. + + + Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. + + + In the Style list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. + + + The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5d2500bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait) + /text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp + + + + page styles;orientation/scope + page formats; changing individual pages + formatting; changing individual pages + portrait and landscape + landscape and portrait + printing;portrait/landscape format + orientation of pages + paper orientation + pages;orientation + sideways orientation of pages + scope of page styles + +

Changing Page Orientation +

+ All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. + It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border. +

To Change the Page Orientation for All Pages

+ If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: + + + Choose Format - Page Style. + + + Click the Page tab. + + + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + + + Click OK. + + +

To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages

+ $[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. + At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page. + Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes. + To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. + + + Click the Page tab. + + + Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. + + + Click OK. + + + Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed. + +

To Quickly Switch Between Portrait and Landscape Page Layout

+
+ The default template provided by %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers several page layout styles, among which the Default Page Style has Portrait orientation and the Landscape style has landscape orientation. + These styles can be used to quickly switch between portrait and landscape orientation by inserting manual breaks and choosing the appropriate page styles as described below: + + + Place the cursor where the page break is to be inserted. + + + Go to Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. The Insert Break dialog will open. + + + Choose the option Page break and in the Page Style drop-down list choose the page style to be applied to the page after the break (Default Page Style, Landscape, etc). + + + If the applied has to be changed again at a certain point in the document (for instance, to switch back from landscape to portrait orientation), place the cursor at this point and repeat the steps previously described. + + +
+ +
+

The Scope of Page Styles

+ You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? +

One Page Long Styles

+ A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page Style - Organizer tab page. + A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. + To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press CommandCtrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. +

Manually Defined Range of a Page style

+ The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page Style - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. + You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. + Perform any one of the following commands: + + + To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + + To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose View - Styles. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + + +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5e77e0df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + Creating and Applying Page Styles + /text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp + + + + + + + page styles;creating and applying + defining;page styles + styles;for pages + overriding next style;for pages + + +

Creating and Applying Page Styles

+$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. + +

To Define a New Page Style

+ + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. + + + To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. + + + + + Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. + + + +

To Apply a Page Style

+ + + + Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Page Style icon. + Double-click a name in the list. + + + Right-click the page style displayed in the Status Bar. Select another page style. + + + +

To Manually Override the “Next style” of a Page Style

+ + + + Place cursor between the page with the page style and the page with the style specified in Next style. + + + Right-click and choose Edit Page Break. + + + Select the With page style checkbox. + + + Enter the page style to be applied. + + +See Manually Defined Range of a Page style. + + A special situation arises when a Next style is different than the page style itself, and you want to apply that page style to two consecutive pages. For example, if you have applied First Page style to a page, and want to apply First Page style again to the immediately following page, then you must manually override First Page style, because it is configured to be followed by Default Page Style. + +

To Apply a Page Style to a New Page

+ + + + Click in the document where you want a new page to start. + + + Choose Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Page Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e11774fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Printing a Brochure + /text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp + + + +printing; individual brochures + booklet printing + brochures; printing individual + +

Printing a Brochure +

+ You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book. + When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document. +%PRODUCTNAME is not designed to handle brochure printing of documents that include landscape page orientations, but it is possible to print such documents. + It is not possible to print a large image across two pages. Cut the image into two parts, and insert each part on different pages. +

To Print a Brochure

+ + + Choose File - Print. + + + In the Print dialog, click Properties. + + + In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. + + + If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. + + + Return to Print dialog. + + + In the Page Layout section, select Brochure. + + + For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify in the Range and Copies section to include Odd and Even Pages. + + + + + Click Print. + + + + If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, select Print in reverse order in the Range and Copies section, and then print the document again. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dc17c276 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + Previewing a Page Before Printing + /text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp + + + +printing; previews + previews; print layouts + print layout checks + book view + pages;previews +MW changed "page views" to "pages;previews" +Previewing a Page Before Printing + + + + Choose File - Print Preview. + + + Use the zoom icons on the Print Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. + To print your document scaled down, set the print options on the Page Layout tab page of the File - Print dialog. + + + Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Print Preview bar to scroll through the document. + + +
+ + File - Print Preview. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6902aef23 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting What to Print + /text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp + + + + +selecting; pages to print +printing;page range +printing;selection + + +

Selecting What to Print

+You can choose to print individual pages, a range of pages, or a selection from a document. +

Printing a single page

+ + + Choose File - Print to open the Print dialog. + + + In the Range and Copies section, select the Pages option. The text box will show the current page number. + + + Enter the page number you want to print. + + + The preview box on the left shows the selected page. + + + + +

Printing a range of pages

+ + + Choose File - Print to open the Print dialog. + + + In the Range and Copies section, select the Pages option. The text box will show the current page number. + + + Enter the page numbers to print. +
+ + + Use - for a range of pages. For example, 1-4 prints all pages from 1 to 4. + + + Partial ranges are also allowed: -5 prints all pages up to page 5; 10- prints from page 10 to end of document. + + + Use , or ; for a list of pages. For example, 1,3;7 prints pages 1, 3 and 7. Spaces are optional: 1, 3, 7 also works. + + + Combinations are also possible. For example, 1, 3, 5-10, 15- prints pages 1,3, 5 to 10, and 15 to end of document. + + +
+ + + The preview box on the left shows the selected pages. + + + +

Printing a selection of text or graphics

+ + + Select the content to print. + + + Choose File - Print to open the Print dialog. + + + In the Range and Copies section, choose the Selection option. + + + The preview box shows the selected material. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3a287f8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet + /text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp + + + +multi-page view of documents + pages;printing multiple on one sheet + overviews;printing multi-page view + printing;multiple pages per sheet + reduced printing of multiple pages + MW changed "overviews;" +

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet +

+ In the Page Layout section of the File - Print dialog, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. + + + Choose File - Print + + + In the Page Layout section, do one of the following: + + + + + To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, select "2" in the Pages per sheet box. + + + To print multiple pages on the same sheet, select the number of pages per sheet and optionally set the order of pages. The small preview shows the arrangement of pages. + + + + + Click Print. + + +
+ + File - Print Preview +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..878c9f302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting printer paper trays + /text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp + + + + + + + selecting;paper trays + paper tray selection + +mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry + +Selecting Printer Paper Trays +Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. + + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. + + + In the Paper tray box, select the paper tray that you want to use. + + + Click OK. + + + Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. + + + Apply the page style to the pages that you want. + + + + +Creating and applying page styles + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aac6b5646 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing in Reverse Order + /text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp + + + +ordering;printing in reverse order + printing; reverse order + +Printing in Reverse Order + + + + Choose File - Print. + + + Click the General tab. + + + Choose Print in reverse page order. + + + Click Print. + + + + + Printing + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bf9bf2bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + /text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp + + + + + + + indexes;unprotecting + tables of contents;unprotecting + tables;protecting/unprotecting cells + sections;protecting/unprotecting + unprotecting tables of contents and indexes + protecting;tables and sections + cells;protecting/unprotecting + document;protection from changes + + + +

Protecting Contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from being modified or deleted. + +

Protecting Sections in %PRODUCTNAME Writer

+Any section of a %PRODUCTNAME Writer text document can be protected against changes, and with an optional password. +Protection is not intended to be an information security protection, it is a switch to prevent accidental changes. + +

Turning on protection

+Information to protect must be in a section. To create or select a section: + + + + If the section does not exist: Select the text, then choose menu Insert - Section... . + + + If the section already exists: Choose menu Format - Sections... and select the section in the list Section, or right-click on the section in the Navigator and choose Edit.... + + +To enable protection + + + + If you want to protect the contents without a password, choose the Protect check box under the Write protection. + + + If you want the protection with a password, choose Protect and With password check boxes and click on the Password… button. Enter and confirm a password of at least five characters. + + + +

Modification of protection

+ + + + + If the protection does not have a password and you would like to use one, choose the With password checkbox, click the Password button, and enter and confirm a password of at least five characters. + + + If the protection has a password and you want to clear it, uncheck the With password box under Write protection and enter the correct password. + + + If the section is protected with a password and you want to change it, click on the Password button in the Edit Sections window and enter the correct password twice. + + + +

Turning off protection

+ + + + + If the protection does not have a password, uncheck the Protect box under Write protection. + + + If the protection has a password, uncheck the Protect box under Write protection and enter the correct password. + + + +

Protecting Cells in a %PRODUCTNAME Writer Table

+You can protect the contents of individual cells of tables or whole table in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from changes. + + +

+ + + + For one or several cells, place the cursor in a cell or select needed several cells. Choose the Table - Protect Cells in menu bar. + + + For whole table, select the table, and choose the Table - Protect Cells in menu bar. + + + +

+If necessary, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Enable cursor under the Protected Areas. + + + + Place the cursor in the cell or in the selected cells and choose the Table - Unprotect Cells in menu bar. + + + For whole table, right-click on the table in the Navigator, and choose Table - Unprotect in the context menu or select the whole table and choose Table - Unprotect Cells in menu bar. + + + +

Contents Protection in Tables of Contents and Indexes

+Tables of contents and indexes created in %PRODUCTNAME Writer, are automatically protected against accidental changes. + + +

+ + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents. Choose Edit Index... in the context menu. Choose Protected against manual changes on the Type tab. + + + Right-click on the index or table of contents in the Navigator and choose Index - Read-only item. + + + +

+ + + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents. Choose Edit Index... in the context menu. Uncheck Protected against manual changes on the Type tab. + + + Right-click in the index or table of contents in the Navigator and uncheck Index - Read-only. + + + +

Protecting fields and bookmarks from changes

+Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Fields to protect all fields against changes. Use this protection to prevent accidental changes in fields. +Choose Tools - Protect Document - Protect Bookmarks to protect all bookmarks against changes. Use this protection to prevent accidental bookmark changes. + +

Protection of the whole %PRODUCTNAME Writer document from changes.

+You can protect the contents of %PRODUCTNAME Writer document from changes, with one of the following file formats: .doc, .docx, .odt, .ott. + +To enable the protection of the whole document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility and choose Protect form. To disable protection, uncheck it. + + + +Protecting Other Contents + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d3e0522b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references.xhp + + + + + + + references; inserting cross-references + cross-references; inserting and updating + tables; cross-referencing + pictures; cross-referencing + objects; cross-referencing + OLE objects;cross-referencing + draw objects;cross-referencing + updating;cross-references + inserting;cross-references + + + +Inserting Cross-References +Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document. +Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets. + +Cross-Referencing Text +Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text. + +To Insert a Target + + + + Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select “Set Reference”. + + + Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. + + + Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection list. + + +Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section. + +To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target + + + + Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. + + + In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". + + + In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Refer using list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + +Cross-Referencing an Object +You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. + + + In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Refer using list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + +Updating Cross-References +To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose Tools - Update - Fields from the menu or press F9. +Choose View - Field Names to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ebe6ae8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Modifying Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp + + + + + + + references; modifying cross-references + cross-references; modifying + editing;cross-references + searching;cross-references + + + +Modifying Cross-References + + + + Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. + If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press CommandCtrl+F8. + + + Choose Edit - Fields. + + + Set the options that you want, and then click OK. + + +Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..025fb73e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Printing with Page line-spacing (register-true) + /text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp + + + +rows; register-true text + lines of text; register-true + pages;register-true + paragraphs;register-true + register-true;pages and paragraphs + spacing;register-true text + formatting;register-true text + +

Printing with Page line-spacing

+ Page line-spacing printing is particularly useful for documents that will have two pages set next to each other (for example, in a book or brochure), for multi-column layouts, and for documents intended for double-sided printing. + +

To Enable a Document for Page Line-spacing Printing

+ + + Choose Format - Page Style - Page tab. + + + In the Layout Settings section, select the Use page line-spacing checkbox, set the Reference Style, and click OK. + The Reference Style sets an invisible vertical (typographical) grid, using the line distance specified in the style. All paragraphs that have Page line-spacing activated will use that line distance, aligning the bottom of a text line to the next grid line, regardless of font size or presence of graphics. + All paragraphs with the selected Reference Style (or that inherit the Reference Style) will be activated automatically for Page line-spacing. + + +

To Exempt or Enable Paragraphs for Page Line-spacing Printing

+ + + Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + + + Clear the Activate page line-spacing checkbox to exempt paragraphs. Set the checkbox to enable. + The checkbox has no effect, if Page line-spacing is disabled in the Page style. + + +

To Exempt or Enable Paragraph Styles for Page Line-spacing Printing

+ + + Open the Styles window (Command+TF11), click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa51f9af4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Removing Line Breaks + /text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp + + + +hard returns in pasted text + line breaks;removing + deleting; line breaks + copies;removing line breaks + paragraph marks;removing +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...".MW changed "paragraph marks;..." +Removing Line Breaks + + Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. + This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. + + + On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. + + + In the Apply Style box on the Formatting bar, choose “Default”. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e760da92b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resetting Font Attributes + /text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp + + + +formats; resetting + font attributes; resetting + fonts; resetting + resetting; fonts + direct formatting;exiting + formatting;exiting direct formatting + exiting;direct formatting +mw made "exiting..." a two level entry +Resetting Font Attributes + + + + You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing CommandCtrl+Shift+X. For example, if you have pressed CommandCtrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press CommandCtrl+Shift+X to return to the default character format of the paragraph. + + + To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b49105552 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Docking and Resizing Windows +/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Navigator;docking and resizing +Styles window;docking and resizing +Gallery;docking and resizing +docking; Navigator window +resizing;windows + +Docking and Resizing Windows + +You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles window. + + +To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles window, hold down the CommandCtrl key and double-click on a gray area in the window. Alternatively, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. + + +To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..643b7276c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Using Rulers + /text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp + + + +rulers;using rulers +horizontal rulers +vertical rulers +indents; setting on rulers +page margins on rulers +table cells;adjusting the width on rulers +showing;rulers +hiding;rulers +adjusting page margins + +

Using Rulers +

+ To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. +

Adjusting Page Margins

+ The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. +

Changing Indents

+ Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. + + + To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + + + To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. + + + For example, to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the CommandCtrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right + You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog. +
+ + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef209ff8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Using Regular Expressions in Text Searches + /text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp + + + + + + searching; with regular expressions + regular expressions;searching + examples for regular expressions + characters;finding all + invisible characters;finding + paragraph marks;searching + + Using Regular Expressions in Text Searches + Regular expressions can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. + Searching with regular expressions is different from searching with wildcards. %PRODUCTNAME Writer only supports searching with regular expressions. + You can use regular expressions when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Select the Regular expressions check box. + + + In the Find box, type the search term and the regular expression(s) that you want to use in your search. + + + Click Find Next or Find All. + + + Regular Expression Examples + + + The regular expression for a single character is a period (.). + + + The regular expression for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + + + The regular expression combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + + + The regular expression for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The regular expression character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + + + The regular expression for a tab character is \t. + + + A search using a regular expression will work only within one paragraph. To search using a regular expression in more than one paragraph, do a separate search in each paragraph. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c937b8fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp + + + +sections; editing +sections;deleting +deleting;sections + editing;sections + read-only sections + protecting;sections + converting;sections, into normal text + hiding;sections +ufi: added two deleting sections entries +Editing Sections + + You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. + + + Choose Format - Sections. + + + In the Section list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Command +Ctrl+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or Command +Ctrl+click to select some sections. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + +To convert a section into normal text, click Remove. + + +To make a section read-only, select the Protected check box in the Write Protection area. + + + Add an optional protection password. The password can be empty and no password will be required to remove protection. If the password is not empty, it will be required to unprotect the section. + + +To hide a section, select the Hide check box in the Hide area. + + +removed ordered list with startvalue 4, not sure if such a list will survive all transformations + + + + + + Read-only contents;editing + Protect section;removing + +

Editing Read-Only Contents

+ A warning message is displayed if you try to edit protected sections. + To remove protection of a section, do the following: + + + Choose Format - Sections. + + + Select the section to unprotect in the Section area of the dialog. + + + Uncheck the Protect option in the Write Protection area of the dialog. + + + If the section was protected with a non-empty password, type the password into the dialog that opens. + + + Click OK . + + + + + + + Format - Sections + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..483fe31bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp + + + + + + + sections; inserting + inserting; sections + HTML documents;inserting linked sections + updating;linked sections, manually + links;inserting sections + + + +Inserting Sections +You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document. + +To Insert a New Section + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section. + If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section box, type a name for the section. + + + Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. + + + +To Insert a Section as a Link +Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. +When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. +You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section box, type a name for the section. + + + In the Link area, select the Link check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. + + + + Click the Browse button next to the File name box. + + + Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + + + In the Section box, select the section that you want to insert. + + + Click Insert. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93cb92f5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Sections + /text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp + + + +multi-column text + text; multi-column + columns; on text pages + text columns + sections; columns in/use of +mw changed a typo in "multicolumn"mw deleted "sections;using" and changed "section;columns in" +Using Sections + + Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways: + + + To prevent text from being edited. + + + To show or hide text. + + + To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents. + + + To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style. + + + A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text. + You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document. + To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press Option +Alt+Enter. + Sections and Columns + You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column. + A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style. +
+ + + DDE +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddba944b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Saving Text Documents in HTML Format + /text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp + + + + + + + text documents; publishing in HTML + HTML documents; creating from text documents + homepage creation + saving;in HTML format + + + +Saving Text Documents in HTML Format +You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages. +When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG. + + + + Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. + + + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. + + + In the Styles box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. + + + Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a1115f1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Text Formatting While You Type + /text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp + + + +text; formatting bold while typing + formatting; bold, while typing + keyboard;bold formatting + bold;formatting while typing + shortcut keys;bold formatting + +Applying Text Formatting While You Type + + To apply bold formatting + + + Select the text that you want to format. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+B. + You can also press Command +Ctrl+B, type the text that you want to format in bold, and then press Command +Ctrl+B when you are finished. + + + To apply italic formatting + + + Select the text that you want to format. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+I. + You can also press Command +Ctrl+I, type the text that you want to format in italic, and then press Command +Ctrl+I when you are finished. + + + To underline text + + + Select the text that you want to underline. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+U. + You can also press Command +Ctrl+U, type the text that you want underlined, and then press Command +Ctrl+U when you are finished. + + + + + Keyboard shortcut for text documents + Keyboard shortcut in $[officename] + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26a5b0d50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Smart Tags + /text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp + + + +smart tags +AutoCorrect function; smart tags +options;smart tags +disabling;smart tags +installing;smart tags +MW moved 2 index entries from shared/01/06040700.xhp, inverted "smart tags;options", made "smart tags;" a one level entry and added 2 entries +Using Smart Tags + + Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions. + Installing Smart Tags + Smart Tags can be supplied as extensions to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: + + + Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. + + + Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. + + + Smart Tags Menu + Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. + When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to CommandCtrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. + In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. + To Enable and Disable Smart Tags + When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. + Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1d0026834 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Checking Spelling and Grammar + /text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp + + + + + + + spellcheck; checking text documents manually + checking spelling;manually + grammar checker + + +Checking Spelling and Grammar +You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document. +To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the extensions web page. +The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection. + + + + Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. + + + Choose Tools - Spelling. + + + When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spelling dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections. + + + Do one of the following: + To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Correct. + Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Correct. + To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. + + + +
+removed a line +Spelling dialog + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11654e207 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp + + + +fill format mode + copying; styles, by fill format mode + brush for copying styles + styles; transferring + formats; copying and pasting + text formats; copying and pasting +mw changed "copying;" +Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode + + You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles window. + + + Choose View - Styles. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. + + + Click the style, and then click the Fill Format Mode icon +Icon + in the Styles window. + + + Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. + + + Press Esc when finished. + + +
+ + + + + + + Styles +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2bbd4a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Creating New Styles From Selections + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp + + + + + + + styles; creating from selections + drag and drop;creating new styles + copying;styles, from selections + +mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;" + +

Creating New Styles From Selections

+ +

To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection

+ + + + Choose View - Styles to open the Styles deck in the Sidebar. + + + Click the icon at the top of the Styles deck for the style category of the new style. + + + Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph to which you applied manual formatting. + + + Click the Style actions menu icon at the top right corner of the Styles deck and choose New Style from Selection from the submenu. + + + Enter a name for the new style in the New Style from Selection dialog box. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + +Icon New Style from Selection + + + + Styles actions menu icon + + +
+ + +

To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop

+ + + + + + + + + + For paragraph, character and list styles, select at least one character in the style that you want to copy, then drag the selection to the Styles deck and release. For frame styles, select the frame and hold the mouse button pressed until the mouse icon changes, then drag to the Styles deck and release. + Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop the selection onto the respective icon at the top of the Styles deck. You do not need to open that style category in advance. + + + + + + + +For page and table styles, you must use the Styles actions menu at the top right corner of the Styles deck. The drag-and-drop method is not possible with these styles. +
+Styles (Sidebar) +Styles - New Style from Selection + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..600c80e90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Updating Styles From Selections + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp + + + +Stylist, see Styles window + styles; updating from selections + templates; updating from selections + Styles window; updating from selections + updating; styles, from selections + +

Updating Styles From Selections +

+ + + Choose View - Styles or press Command+TF11. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144# + + + In the document, click from where you want to copy the updated style. For example, click a paragraph to which you applied some manual formatting that you want to copy now. + + + In the Styles window, click the style that you want to update. + + + Click the arrow next to the Style actions icon and choose Update Selected Style from the submenu. + + + Only the manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window. Any attributes that were applied as part of a style will not be added to the updated style. +
+ + + + Styles +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..505b5f8a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Making Text Superscript or Subscript + /text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp + + + +text; subscript and superscript + superscript text + subscript text + characters;subscript and superscript + +Making Text Superscript or Subscript + + + + Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. + + + Do one of the following: + + + somehow the following list disappeared, see issue 112471, and this remained: (list type="unordered"/) (replaced brackets) + + + +Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. + + +Press CommandCtrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and CommandCtrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. + + +In the Properties deck of the sidebar, go to the Character area and click the Superscript or Subscript buttons. + + + + + Format - Character - Position + Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5afd032cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + Merging and Splitting Cells + /text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp + + + +cells; merging/splitting + tables; merging cells + cell merges + splitting cells;by menu command + merging;cells +mw made "cell merges;" a one level entry +Merging and Splitting Cells +mw created this file out of the shared guide "table_cellmerge.xhp", see also bug #63021 + You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells. + To Merge Cells + + + Select the adjacent cells. + + + Choose Table - Merge Cells. + + + To Split Cells + + + Place the cursor in the cell to be split. + + + Choose Table - Split Cells. + A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..412f0595b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table + /text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp + + + +deleting; tables or table contents + tables; deleting + +Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table + + You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. + + + To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. + + + To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press Command +Ctrl+A UFI: Ctrl+A once is not enoughuntil all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4631a1f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting Tables + /text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp + + + +tables; inserting text tables + inserting; tables in text + DDE; inserting tables + OLE objects; inserting tables in + cells;inserting from spreadsheets + tables in spreadsheets;inserting in text + spreadsheets;inserting tables from +mw changed "cell ranges;" to "cells;" +Inserting Tables + + There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. UFI: from a database? + To Insert a Table From a Toolbar + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + + + On the Standard or the Insert bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. + + + In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. + + + To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant + To Insert a Table With a Menu Command + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. + + + Choose Table - Insert Table. + + + In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. + + + Select the options that you want, click OK. + + + To Insert a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet + + + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + + + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + + + Choose Edit - Copy. + + + In your text document, do one of the following: + + + + + + + +Choose Edit - Paste. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object. + + +Choose Edit - Paste Special, and choose from the following options: + + + + + + + + + Options + + + Is inserted as... + + + + + $[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet + + + OLE object - as with Command +Ctrl+V or drag-and-drop + + + + + GDIMetaFile + + + Graphic + + + + + Bitmap + + + Graphic + + + + + HTML + + + HTML table + + + + + Unformatted text + + + Text only, tab stops as separators + + + + + Formatted text [RTF] + + + Text table + + + + + DDE link (only under Windows) + + + + Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating + + + +
+ + Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet + + + Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert. + + + In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. + + + Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells. + + + Drag the selected cells into the text document. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3e30c0a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Repeating a Table Header on a New Page + /text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp + + + + + + + tables; heading repetition after page breaks + repeating; table headings after page breaks + headings; repeating in tables + multi-page tables + +MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"mw added "multi-page tables" + + +Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page +You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. + + + + Choose Table - Insert Table. + + + Select the Heading and the Repeat heading rows on new pages check boxes. + + + Select the number of rows and columns for the table. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cfb07023 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns +/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp + + +UFI: Selecting tables + + + +selecting;tables +tables;selecting +columns;selecting +rows;selecting + +Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns + +You can select a table in a text document with a keyboard or with a mouse. + + +To select a table with the keyboard, move the cursor into the table, and then press CommandCtrl+A until all the cells are selected. + + +To select a table with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to a position just above and left of the table. The mouse pointer becomes a diagonal arrow. Click to select the table. + + +To select a row or column with the mouse, point to a position just left of the row or above the column. The mouse pointer becomes an arrow. Click to select the row or column. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..838de6e43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + +Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table +/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp + + + + +cells; enlarging and reducing in text tables +table cells; enlarging/reducing in text +keyboard; resizing rows/columns +resizing;rows and columns in text tables +enlarging columns,cells and table rows +reducing rows and columns in text tables +tables; resizing/juxtaposing +juxtaposing tables +heights of table rows +widths of table columns +rows;resizing in tables +columns;resizing in tables +column widths in tables +mw deleted "text tables;enlarging cells", "tables;changing the size", "tables;arranging" and "arranging;tables". MW changed "tables;sizing" and "table cells;". MW added "reducing rows and columns in text tables"MW changed "tables;" and added "juxtaposing tables"MW added 5 index entries wrt column widths and row heights +

Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table

+You can resize the width of table cells and columns, as well as change the height of table rows. + + + + +Icon + + + +You can also distribute rows and columns evenly using the icons on the Optimize Size toolbar on the Table Bar. + + +
+ +

Changing the Width of Columns and Cells

+

To Change the Width of a Column

+Do one of the following: + + +Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. + + +Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. + + +Hold down Command +Ctrl and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally. + + +Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the Option +Alt key, and then press the left or the right arrow key. + + +To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down Option +Alt+Shift, and then press the right arrow key. + +You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. +

To Change the Width of a Cell

+Hold down Option+CommandAlt+Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key +

Changing the Height of a Row

+To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the OptionAlt key, and then press the up or the down arrow key. +

Resizing a Whole Table

+To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following: + + +Click inside the table. In the rulers, drag the border between the white and the gray area to resize the table. + + +Click inside the table. Choose Table - Properties to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers. + +To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press Command +Ctrl+A twice to select the whole table, then choose Insert - Frame. +Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfadc1b0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp + + + +table mode selection +proportional distribution of tables +relative distribution of table cells +tables; adapting the width by keyboard +cells; adapting the width by keyboard +keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns +behavior of rows/columns + +Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard + When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. + Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 + To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. There are three display modes for tables: + + + Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + + + Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + + + Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7385cfbb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Templates and Styles + /text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp + + + +formatting styles; styles and templates + styles; styles and templates + organizing; templates (guide) + templates; organizing (guide) + +

Templates and Styles +

+ A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles. + Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template. + $[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types of text documents, such as business letters. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84dc222a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Animating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp + + + + + + + text animation + effects; text animation + animations;text + +mw made "animating text" a two level entry + +Animating Text +You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text. + + + + Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate. + + + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes, and then click the Text Animation tab. + + + In the Effect box, select the animation that you want. + + + Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e95968718 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing the Case of Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp + + + +characters; uppercase or lowercase + text; uppercase or lowercase + lowercase letters; text + uppercase; formatting text + capital letters;changing to small letters + changing;cases of text + initial capitals in titles + small capitals (guide) +MW added "small capitals" +Changing the Case of Text + + You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. + When you apply formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Text or Format - Text - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. + To Capitalize Text + + + Select the text that you want to capitalize. + + + Do one of the following: + Choose Format - Text - Uppercase. + Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all letters. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word. "Small capitals" capitalizes all letters, but in a reduced font size. + + + To Change Text to Lowercase + + + Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. + + + Do one of the following: + Choose Format - Text - Lowercase. + Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3d93590b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + /text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp + + + + + + + frames; centering on pages + centering;frames on pages + title pages; centering text on + + + +Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + + + + Select the text that you want to center on the page. + + + Choose Insert - Frame. + + + In the Anchor area, select To page. + + + In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame. + + + In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. + + + Click OK. + + +To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Border box in the Line Arrangement area. +To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c91cbb451 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Using the Direct Cursor + /text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp + + + +text; cursor +entering text with direct cursor +direct cursor; settings +writing with direct cursor +cursor;direct cursor +settings;direct cursor + +

Using the Direct Cursor

+ The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. + To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. + + + On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon +Icon. Alternatively, enable Direct Cursor by going to Edit - Direct Cursor Mode. + + + Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: + + + + + + + +Align left + + + + Align left + + + + + +Centered + + + + Centered + + + + + +Align right + + + + Align right + + +
+ + + + Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. + + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82f79284c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + Emphasizing Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp + + + +text; emphasizing + emphasizing text + +Emphasizing Text + + Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document: + + + Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold. + + + Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. + + + Select the text, and then choose Insert - Frame. + + + Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. + + + Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f48e81f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames + /text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp + + + +frames; inserting/editing/linking + editing;frames + inserting;frames + resizing;frames, by mouse + scaling; frames, by mouse + links;frames + text flow; from frame to frame + frames; linking + printing;hiding frames from printing +mw deleted "text;" and changed "printing;" +Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames + + A frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. + To Insert a Frame + + + Select the text that you want to include in the frame. + + + Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. + + + To Edit a Frame + + + To edit the contents of a frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. + + + To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. + + + To resize a frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. + + + To Hide Text From Printing + Any Writer frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. + + + Select the frame (you see the eight handles). + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options. + + + In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. + + + To Link Frames + You can link Writer frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. + + + Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. + + + On the Frame Bar, click the Link Frames icon +Icon + . + + + Click the frame that you want to link to. + + + You can only link frames if: + + + The target frame is empty. + + + The target frame is not linked to another frame. + + + The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. + + + The source frame does not have a next link. + + + The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. + + + When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. + The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.UFI: removed +id="par_id3147542" You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. +Obviously this works now +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8af8c9511 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + + Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard + /text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp + + + +text; navigating and selecting with keyboard + navigating; in text, with keyboard + selecting;text, with keyboard + keyboard; navigating and selecting in text + +Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard + + You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. + + + To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table. + + + To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor. + + + + + + Key + + + Function + + + + +Command key +Ctrl key + + + + + Right, left arrow keys + + + Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. + + + Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. + + + + + Up, down arrow keys + + + Moves the cursor up or down one line. + + + (Command+Option +Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. + + + + + Home + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + + Home + In a table + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. + + + Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + + End + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the document + + + + + End + In a table + + + Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. + + + Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. + + + + + PgUp + + + Scrolls up one page. + + + Moves the cursor to the header. + + + + + PgDn + + + Scroll down one page. + + + Moves the cursor to the footer. + + +
+
+ + + Selection Modes +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9da6f39ca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Rotating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + + + + + + text; rotating + rotating;text + + + +Rotating Text +You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object. + + + + Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. + + + Select the Text icon Icon. + + + Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text. + + + Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate icon Icon on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. + + + Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. + + +You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. + +
+ +Show Draw Functions +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..638ba62cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting an Entire Text Document + /text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp + + + +sections;inserting external content + text documents;merging + links;inserting text documents as + inserting;text documents +mw deleted "text;" +Inserting an Entire Text Document + + To Insert a Text File + + + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Text from File. + + + Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. + + + The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. + To Insert an Entire Text Document as a Link + + + Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. + + + In the File Name box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the Browse button and locate the file. + If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the + Sections box. + + + If you want, set the formatting options for the section. + + + Click Insert. + + + $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0806e1eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hyphenation + /text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp + + + +hyphenation;manual/automatic + separation, see hyphenation + automatic hyphenation in text + manual hyphenation in text +mw transferred 2 entries to hyphen_prevent.xhp +Hyphenation + + By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: + Automatic Hyphenation + Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs. + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph + + + Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + + + Click OK. + + + To Automatically Hyphenate Text in Multiple Paragraphs + If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style. + For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. + + + Manual Hyphenation + You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation. + To Manually Hyphenate Single Words + To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command +Ctrl+Hyphen(-). + If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. + To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection + + + Select the text that you want to hyphenate. + + + Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + + + + + + + + Text Flow + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b84146bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Bullets + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp + + + + + + + unordered lists;turning on and off + paragraphs; bulleted + bullets;adding and editing + formatting;bullets + removing;bullets in text documents + changing;bulleting symbols + + +

Adding Bullets

+ +

To Add Bullets

+ + + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Unordered List icon (Shift+F12). + + + + +To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Toggle Unordered List icon on the Formatting Bar. + +

To Format Bullets

+ + + To change the formatting of an unordered list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + + + Click on the Unordered tab or the Image tab, and then select a symbol style in the Selection area. + + + To introduce another bulleting symbol, click on the Customize tab, click the Select button next to Character, then select a special character. + + + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..914e71aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp + + + +numbering;paragraphs, on and off + paragraphs;toggle ordered list + formatting;ordered lists + inserting;numbering + +

Adding Numbering

+

To Add Numbering to a List

+ + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Toggle Ordered List icon (F12) + + + Right-click, choose List, then select a list style. + + + +A paragraph style can be configured to add numbering. +

To Remove Paragraphs from an Ordered List

+To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, then click the Toggle Ordered List icon or the No List icon on the Formatting Bar. +

To Format an Ordered List

+To change the formatting of a numbered list, do one of the following: + + + Click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + + + Right-click in the list, then choose List - Bullets and Numbering. + + +To change the hierarchy of an ordered list, click in the list, then use the icons in the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. + Copying or moving an item from a numbered list to a new location continues the list numbering. To start a new numbering with the pasted item, click Toggle Ordered List twice. Any formatting on the pasted item is reset to default. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86fb4b4e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Numbering and Paragraph Styles + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp + + + + + + numbering;manually/by styles + list styles + manual numbering in text + paragraph styles;numbering + +

Numbering and Paragraph Styles +

+ You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. + If you want numbered headings, use Tools - Chapter Numbering, instead of numbering manually. +

To Apply Numbering Manually

+ To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Toggle Ordered List icon on the Formatting bar, or use the dropdown box on the icon to select a numbering format. + You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles window. + + + UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhpWhen you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, %PRODUCTNAME automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again. + + + To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + + + To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + + + Use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering bar to change the order and level of list paragraphs. + + + To see which paragraphs are in the same list, click to the left of a number or symbol at the beginning of a list paragraph, with View - Field Shadings (CommandCtrl+F8) enabled. + + + To add selected paragraphs to an existing list, use Format - Lists - Add to List. + +

To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style

+ Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the list style assigned to a paragraph style, then the numbering format in the list style is applied automatically to all paragraphs using the paragraph style. + + + Choose View - Styles, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. + + + Click the Outline & List tab. + + + In the List style box, select the list style to apply. + + + Click OK. + + + Apply the paragraph style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + List Style +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..051ec6145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + Thesaurus + /text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp + + + +thesaurus; related words + related words in thesaurus + spelling in thesaurus + dictionaries; thesaurus + lexicon, see thesaurus + synonyms in thesaurus + searching;synonyms + +
+

Thesaurus

+ Use the thesaurus to look up synonyms or related terms. +
+ + + Click in the word that you want to look up or replace. + + Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press CommandCtrl+F7. + + + In the Alternatives list, click an entry to copy that related term to the "Replace with" text box. + + Optionally double-click an entry to look up related terms for that entry. On your keyboard, you can also press the arrow up or down keys to select an entry. Then press Return to replace, or press the spacebar to look up. + + Click Replace. + + + + + Initially, the thesaurus uses the language of the selected word in the document, if a thesaurus library for that language is installed. The title bar of the Thesaurus dialog displays the language in use. To look up the word in a different language, click the Language button, and select one of the installed thesaurus languages. A thesaurus library may not be available for all installed languages. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page.If a thesaurus library is installed for the language of a word, the context menu of the word shows a Synonyms submenu. Select any of the terms from the submenu to replace the word. + + + Thesaurus + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1fb694dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + Word Completion for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp + + + +automatic word completion + completion of words + AutoCorrect function; word completion + word completion;using/disabling + disabling;word completion + switching off;word completion + deactivating;word completion + refusing word completions + rejecting word completions +mw made a two level entry of "switching off..." and "word completion", copied two entries to word_completion_adjust.xhp and added a new entry +Word Completion for Text Documents + + $[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. + If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Command +Ctrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Tab. + To Accept/Reject a Word Completion + + + By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. + + + To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. + + + To Switch off the Word Completion + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion. + + + Uncheck Enable word completion. + + +
+ Fine-Tuning the Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798296486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp + + + +settings;word completion + word completion;settings + text documents;word completion settings + weekdays; automatically completing + months; automatically completing +mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries +Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents +MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp +If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. + To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: + To Insert an Additional Space Character + Select Append space. + The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. + To Define the Accept Key + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + To Select the Minimum Number of Characters + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + To Select the Scope of Collected Words + Disable the option When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list. + Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. + If you enable the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. + If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. + To Use the Word List for Further Sessions + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. + + + Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. + The word completion feature collects the words. + + + Select all or some of the words in the list. + + + Use Command +Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. + Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. + + +
+ Word Completion + Using Word Completion +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3d6b0346 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + + Counting Words + /text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp + + + +words; counting in text + number of words + documents; number of words/characters + text; number of words/characters + characters; counting + number of characters + counting words + word counts +MW deleted "character counts" +Counting Words + + + + Word and character count is shown in the status bar, and is kept up to date as you edit. + + + If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. + + + To display extended statistics such as count of characters without spaces, double click the word count in the status bar, or choose Tools - Word Count. + + +
+ How does %PRODUCTNAME count words? + In general, every string of characters between two spaces is a word. Dashes, tabs, line breaks, and paragraph breaks are word limits, too. + Words with always visible hyphens, as in plug-in, add-on, user/config, are counted as one word each. + The words can be a mix of letters, numbers, and special characters. So the following text counts as four words: abc123 1.23 "$" http://www.example.com. + To add a custom character to be considered as the word limit, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General and add the character into the Additional separators field. +
+ To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. + + File - Properties - Statistics + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a81260620 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Wrapping Text Around Objects + /text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp + + + + + + + text wrap around objects + contour editor + contour wrap + text; formatting around objects + formatting; contour wrap + objects; contour wrap + wrapping text;editing contours + editors;contour editor + + + +Wrapping Text Around Objects + +To Wrap Text Around an Object + + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. + The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. + + + +To Specify the Wrapping Properties + + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab. + + + + + + Set the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic +You can change the shape that the text wraps around. + + + + Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. + + + + + + Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark). + + + Close the Contour Editor window. + + + +
+ +Contour Editor +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c21c15651 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/librelogo/LibreLogo.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,420 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +LibreLogo +Logo +Turtle graphics + + +LibreLogo +LibreLogo is a simple, localized, Logo-like programming environment with turtle vector graphics for teaching of computing (programming and word processing), DTP and graphic design. See http://www.numbertext.org/logo/librelogo.pdf. +LibreLogo toolbar +The LibreLogo toolbar (View - Toolbars - Logo) contains turtle moving, program start, stop, home, clear screen, program editor/syntax highlighting/translating icons and an input bar (command line). +Turtle moving icons +They are equivalents of the Logo commands “FORWARD 10”, “BACK 10”, “LEFT 15”, “RIGHT 15”. Clicking on one of the icons will also focus the turtle shape scrolling the page to its position. +Start Logo program +Click on the icon “Start Logo program” to execute the text (or only the selected) text of the Writer document as a LibreLogo program. In an empty document an example program will be inserted and executed. +Click on the icon “Stop” to stop the program execution. +Home +Click on the icon “Home” to reset the position and settings of the turtle. +Clear screen +Click on the icon “Clear screen” to remove the drawing objects of the document. +Program editor/Syntax highlighting/Translating +The “magic wand” icon sets 2-page layout for program editing, expands and converts to uppercase the abbreviated, lowercase Logo commands in the Writer document. Change the language of the document (%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Western) and click on this icon to translate the Logo program to the selected language. +Command line +Hit Enter in the command line to execute its content. To stop the program use the icon “Stop”. +Hold down the Enter to repeat the command line, for example, on the following command sequence: + FORWARD 200 LEFT 89
 +To reset the command line triple-click it or press CommandCtrl+A to select the previous commands, and type the new commands. +Graphical user interface of basic turtle settings +Turtle shape of LibreLogo is a normal fixed size drawing object. You can position and rotate it on standard way, too, using the mouse and the Rotate icon of the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. Modify Line Width, Line Color and Area Color settings of the turtle shape to set PENSIZE, PENCOLOR and FILLCOLOR attributes of LibreLogo. +Program editing +LibreLogo drawings and programs use the same Writer document. The LibreLogo canvas is on the first page of the Writer document. You can insert a page break before the LibreLogo programs and set page zoom using the “magic wand” icon of the Logo toolbar, also change the font size for a comfortable 2-page layout for LibreLogo programming: left (first) page is the canvas, right (second) page is the LibreLogo program editor. +LibreLogo programming language +LibreLogo is an easily localizable, Logo-like programming language, localized in several languages by LibreOffice native language communities. It is back-compatible with the older Logo systems in the case of the simple Logo programs used in education, eg. + TO triangle :size
REPEAT 3 [
FORWARD :size
LEFT 120
]
END

triangle 10 triangle 100 triangle 200
 +Differences from the Logo programming language + + + List members are comma separated: POSITION [0, 0] + + + Program blocks and lists are different + + FIXME: Hack to get a nested list + + + Program blocks need space or new line at parenthesization: REPEAT 10 [ FORWARD 10 LEFT 36 ] + + + Lists need close parenthesization: POSITION [0, 0], and not POSITION [ 0, 0 ] + + + + + 1-line function declarations are not supported (TO and END need new lines). + + +Other features of LibreLogo + + + The colon is optional before the variable names. + TO triangle size
REPEAT 3 [ FORWARD size LEFT 120 ]
END
 + + + String notation supports also orthographical and Python syntax. + PRINT "word ; original Logo syntax
PRINT “Arbitrary text.” ; orthography, Writer
PRINT 'Arbitrary text.' ; Python syntax
 + + + Python list and string handling + PRINT “text”[2] ; print “x”
PRINT “text”[1:3] ; print “ex”
 + + + Python-like FOR loop + + + Python-like variable declaration: + x = 15
PRINT x
 + + + There are no extra query functions: + PRINT FILLCOLOR
p = POSITION
PRINT p
REPEAT 10 [ POSITION ANY POSITION p ]
 + + + Alternative parenthesization in function calls + TO star size color
FILLCOLOR color
REPEAT 5 [ LEFT 72 FORWARD size RIGHT 144 FORWARD size ]
FILL
END

star 100 “red”
star (100, “green”)
star(100, “blue”)
 + + +LibreLogo commands +Basic syntax +Case sensitivity +Commands, color constants are case insensitive: + PRINT “Hello, World!”
print “Hello, World, again!”
 +Variable names are case sensitive: + a = 5
A = 7
PRINT a
PRINT A
 +Program lines +Lines of a LibreLogo program are paragraphs in the Writer document. A program line can contain multiple commands: + PRINT “Hello, World!” PRINT “LibreLogo”
 +Comments +Lines or line parts are comments from a semicolon to the end of the line (paragraph): + ; some comments
PRINT 5 * 5 ; some comments
 +Break program lines to multiple paragraphs +It’s possible to break a program line for more paragraphs using the character tilde at the end of the line: + PRINT “This is a very long ” + ~
“warning message”
 +Turtle moving +FORWARD (fd) + FORWARD 10 ; move forward 10pt (1pt = 1/72 inch)
FORWARD 10pt ; see above
FORWARD 0.5in ; move forward 0.5 inch (1 inch = 2.54 cm)
FORWARD 1" ; see above
FD 1mm
FD 1cm
 +BACK (bk) + BACK 10 ; move back 10pt
 +LEFT (lt) + LEFT 90 ; turn counterclockwise 90 degrees
LEFT 90° ; see above
LT 3h ; see above (clock position)
LT any ; turn to a random position
 +RIGHT (rt) + RIGHT 90 ; turn clockwise 90 degrees
 +PENUP (pu) + PENUP ; turtle will move without drawing
 +PENDOWN (pd) + PENDOWN ; turtle will move with drawing
 +POSITION (pos) + POSITION [0, 0] ; turn and move to the top-left corner
POSITION PAGESIZE ; turn and move to the bottom-right corner
POSITION [PAGESIZE[0], 0] ; turn and move to the top-right corner
POSITION ANY ; turn and move to a random position
 +HEADING (seth) + HEADING 0 ; turn north
HEADING 12h ; see above
HEADING [0, 0] ; turn to the top-left corner
HEADING ANY ; turn to a random direction
 +Other turtle commands +HIDETURTLE (ht) + HIDETURTLE ; hide turtle (until the showturtle command)
 +SHOWTURTLE (st) + SHOWTURTLE ; show turtle
 +HOME + HOME ; reset initial turtle position
 +CLEARSCREEN (cs) + CLEARSCREEN ; remove drawing objects of the document
 +FILL and CLOSE + FILL ; close and fill the actual line shape or points
CLOSE ; close the actual line shape or join the actual points
 +Example: filling a regular triangle: + FORWARD 50 LEFT 120 FORWARD 50 FILL
 +Example: drawing a regular triangle: + FORWARD 50 LEFT 120 FORWARD 50 CLOSE
 +Pen settings +PENSIZE (ps) + PENSIZE 100 ; line width is 100 points
PENSIZE ANY ; equivalent of PENSIZE RANDOM 10
 +PENCOLOR/PENCOLOUR (pc) + PENCOLOR “red” ; set red pen color (by color name, see color constants)
PENCOLOR [255, 255, 0] ; set yellow color (RGB list)
PENCOLOR 0xffff00 ; set yellow color (hexa code)
PENCOLOR 0 ; set black color (0x000000)
PENCOLOR ANY ; random color
PENCOLOR [5] ; set red color (by color identifier, see color constants)
PENCOLOR “invisible” ; invisible pen color for shapes without visible outline
PENCOLOR “~red” ; set random red color
 +PENTRANSPARENCY + PENTRANSPARENCY 80 ; set the transparency of the actual pen color to 80%
 +PENCAP/LINECAP + PENCAP “none” ; without extra line end (default)
PENCAP “round” ; rounded line end
PENCAP “square” ; square line end
 +PENJOINT/LINEJOINT + PENJOINT “rounded” ; rounded line joint (default)
PENJOINT “miter” ; sharp line joint
PENJOINT “bevel” ; bevel line joint
PENJOINT “none” ; without line joint
 +PENSTYLE + PENSTYLE “solid” ; solid line (default)
PENSTYLE “dotted” ; dotted line
PENSTYLE “dashed” ; dashed line

; custom dot–dash pattern specified by a list with the following arguments:
; – number of the neighbouring dots
; – length of a dot
; – number of the neighbouring dashes
; – length of a dash
; – distance of the dots/dashes
; – type (optional):
; 0 = dots are rectangles (default)
; 2 = dots are squares (lengths and distances are relative to the pensize)

PENSTYLE [3, 1mm, 2, 4mm, 2mm, 2] ; ...––...––...––
 +Fill settings +FILLCOLOR/FILLCOLOUR (fc) + FILLCOLOR “blue” ; fill with blue color, see also PENCOLOR
FILLCOLOR “invisible” CIRCLE 10 ; unfilled circle
FILLCOLOR [“blue”, “red”] ; gradient between red and blue
FILLCOLOR [[255, 255, 255], [255, 128, 0]] ; between white and orange
FILLCOLOR [“blue”, “red”, 1, 0, 0] ; set axial gradient (with the required rotation and border settings), possible values: 0-5 = linear, axial, radial, elliptical, square and rectangle gradients
FILLCOLOR [“red”, “blue”, 0, 90, 20] ; linear with 20% border, rotated with 90 degrees from the actual heading of the turtle
FILLCOLOR [“red”, “blue”, 0, 90, 20, 0, 0, 200, 50] ; from 200% to 50% intensity
FILLCOLOR [ANY, ANY, 2, 0, 0, 50, 50] ; radial gradient with random colors and 50-50% horizontal and vertical positions of the center
 +FILLTRANSPARENCY + FILLTRANSPARENCY 80 ; set the transparency of the actual fill color to 80%
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80] ; set linear transparency gradient from 80% to 0%
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80, 20] ; set linear transparency gradient from 80% to 20%
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80, 20, 1, 90] ; set axial transparency gradient rotated with 90 degrees from the actual heading of the turtle
FILLTRANSPARENCY [80, 20, 2, 0, 20, 50, 50] ; set radial transparency gradient from outer 80% to inner 20% transparency with 20% border and with 50-50% horizontal and vertical positions of the center
 +FILLSTYLE + FILLSTYLE 0 ; fill without hatches (default)
FILLSTYLE 1 ; black single hatches (horizontal)
FILLSTYLE 2 ; black single hatches (45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 3 ; black single hatches (-45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 4 ; black single hatches (vertical)
FILLSTYLE 5 ; red crossed hatches (45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 6 ; red crossed hatches (0 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 7 ; blue crossed hatches (45 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 8 ; blue crossed hatches (0 degrees)
FILLSTYLE 9 ; blue triple crossed
FILLSTYLE 10 ; black wide single hatches (45 degrees)

; custom hatches specified by a list with the following arguments:
; – style (1 = single, 2 = double, 3 = triple hatching)
; – color
; – distance
; – degree

FILLSTYLE [2, “green”, 3pt, 15°] ; green crossed hatches (15 degrees)
 +Drawing objects +CIRCLE + CIRCLE 100 ; draw a circle shape (diameter = 100pt)
 +ELLIPSE + ELLIPSE [50, 100] ; draw an ellipse with 50 and 100 diameters
ELLIPSE [50, 100, 2h, 12h] ; draw an elliptical sector (from 2h clock position to 12h)
ELLIPSE [50, 100, 2h, 12h, 2] ; draw an elliptical segment
ELLIPSE [50, 100, 2h, 12h, 3] ; draw an elliptical arc
 +SQUARE + SQUARE 100 ; draw a square shape (size = 100pt)
 +RECTANGLE + RECTANGLE [50, 100] ; draw a rectangle shape (50×100pt)
RECTANGLE [50, 100, 10] ; draw a rectangle with rounded corners
 +POINT + POINT ; draw a point with size and color of the pen
 +CLOSE can join the last points, FILL can fill the shape defined by points. For example, it’s easy to draw a “flat” star starting from its center: + PENUP
REPEAT 5 [
FORWARD 80
POINT
BACK 80
RIGHT 36
FORWARD 50
POINT
BACK 50
RIGHT 120
] FILL
 +LABEL + LABEL “text” ; print text in the turtle position
LABEL 'text' ; see above
LABEL "text ; see above (only for single words)
 +TEXT + CIRCLE 10 TEXT “text” ; set text of the actual drawing object
 +Font settings +FONTCOLOR/FONTCOLOUR + FONTCOLOR “green” ; set font color
 +FONTFAMILY + FONTFAMILY “Linux Libertine G” ; set font (family)
FONTFAMILY “Linux Libertine G:smcp=1” ; set also font feature (small caps)
FONTFAMILY “Linux Libertine G:smcp=1&onum=1” ; small caps + old figures
 +FONTSIZE + FONTSIZE 12 ; set 12pt
 +FONTWEIGHT + FONTWEIGHT “bold” ; set bold font
FONTWEIGHT “normal” ; set normal weight
 +FONTSTYLE + FONTSTYLE “italic” ; set italic variant
FONTSTYLE “normal” ; set normal variant
 +PICTURE (pic) +PICTURE is for + + + shape grouping; + + + starting new line shapes; + + + saving SVG images and SVG/SMIL animations; + + + keeping the consistency of positions and line shapes at the left border. + + +Shape grouping + ; PICTURE [ LibreLogo_commands ]
PICTURE [ FORWARD 100 CIRCLE 100 ] ; tree-like grouped shape
 +See also “Group” in %PRODUCTNAME Writer Help. + TO tree location
PENUP POSITION location HEADING 0 PENDOWN
PICTURE [ FORWARD 100 CIRCLE 100 ] ; tree-like grouped shape
END

PICTURE [ tree [230, 400] tree [300, 400] ] ; grouped shapes in a grouped shape
 +Starting new line shapes + PICTURE ; start a new line shape
FORWARD 10 PICTURE FORWARD 10 ; two line shapes
 +Saving SVG images + PICTURE “example.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 ] ; save the picture as an SVG image file in the user folder
PICTURE “Desktop/example.svg” [ FORWARD 100 CIRCLE 5 ] ; as above, with a relative path
PICTURE “/home/user/example.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 ] ; absolute path for Unix/Linux
PICTURE “C:\example.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 ] ; absolute path for Windows
 +Saving SVG/SMIL animations (drawings with SLEEP commands) + PICTURE “animation.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 SLEEP 1000 CIRCLE 99 ] ; save as an SVG/SMIL animation (see also SLEEP)
PICTURE “animation2.svg” [ CIRCLE 5 SLEEP 1000 CIRCLE 99 SLEEP 2000 ] ; as above, but using SLEEP after the last object will result looping: after 2 seconds the SVG animation restarts in SMIL-conformant browsers +Consistency at the left border +Use PICTURE to keep the consistency of positions and line shapes at the left border of Writer: + PICTURE [ CIRCLE 20 POSITION [-100, 100] CIRCLE 20 ]
 +Loops +REPEAT + ; REPEAT number [ commands ]

REPEAT 10 [ FORWARD 10 LEFT 45 CIRCLE 10 ] ; repeat 10 times
 + ; number is optional

REPEAT [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
 +REPCOUNT +Loop variable (also in the FOR and WHILE loops). + REPEAT 100 [ FORWARD REPCOUNT LEFT 90 ]
 +FOR IN +Loop for the list elements: + FOR i IN [1, 5, 7, 9, 11] [
FORWARD i
LEFT 90
]
 +Loop for the characters of a character sequence: + FOR i IN “text” [
LABEL i
FORWARD 10
]
 +WHILE + WHILE TRUE [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
WHILE REPCOUNT <= 10 [ FORWARD 50 LEFT 36 ] ; as REPEAT 10 [ ... ]
 +BREAK +Stop the loop. + REPEAT [ ; endless loop
POSITION ANY
IF REPCOUNT = 100 [ BREAK ] ; equivalent of the REPEAT 100 [ ... ]
]
 +CONTINUE +Jump into the next iteration of the loop. + REPEAT 100 [
POSITION ANY
IF REPCOUNT % 2 = 0 [ CONTINUE ]
CIRCLE 10 ; draw circles on every 2nd positions
]
 +Conditions +IF + ; IF condition [ true block ]
; IF condition [ true block ] [ false block ]

IF a < 10 [ PRINT “Small” ]
IF a < 10 [ PRINT “Small” ] [ PRINT “Big” ]
 +AND, OR, NOT +Logical operators. + IF a < 10 AND NOT a = 5 [ PRINT “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 or 9” ]
IF a < 10 AND a != 5 [ PRINT “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 or 9” ] ; as above
 +Subroutines +TO, END +New word (or procedure). + TO triangle
REPEAT 2 [ FORWARD 100 RIGHT 120 ] FILL
END

REPEAT 10 [ triangle PENUP POSITION ANY PENDOWN ]
 +OUTPUT +Return value of the function. + TO randomletter
OUTPUT RANDOM “qwertzuiopasdfghjklyxcvbnm”
END

PRINT randomletter + randomletter + randomletter ; print 3-letter random character sequence
 +STOP +Return from the procedure. + TO example number
IF number < 0 [ STOP ]
PRINT SQRT number ; print square root
]

example 100
example -1 ; without output and error
example 25
 +Default variables +ANY +Default random value of colors, etc. + PENCOLOR ANY ; random pen color
 +TRUE +Logical value. + WHILE TRUE [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
PRINT TRUE ; print true
 +FALSE +Logical value. + WHILE NOT FALSE [ POSITION ANY ] ; endless loop
PRINT FALSE ; print false
 +PAGESIZE + PRINT PAGESIZE ; print list of the page sizes in points, eg. [595.30, 841.89]
 +PI/π + PRINT PI ; print 3.14159265359
 +Input/Output +PRINT + PRINT “text” ; print “text” in a dialog box
PRINT 5 + 10 ; print 15
 +INPUT + PRINT INPUT “Input value?” ; ask and print a string by a query dialog box
PRINT FLOAT (INPUT “First number?”) + FLOAT (INPUT “Second number?”) ; simple calculator
 +SLEEP + SLEEP 1000 ; wait for 1000 ms (1 sec)
 +GLOBAL +Set global variables used in procedures. + GLOBAL about
about = “LibreLogo”

TO example
PRINT about
GLOBAL about ; when we want to add a new value
about = “new value for the global variable”
END

example
PRINT about
 +Functions +RANDOM + PRINT RANDOM 100 ; random float number (0 <= x < 100)
PRINT RANDOM “text” ; random letter of the “text”
PRINT RANDOM [1, 2] ; random list element (1 or 2)
 +INT + PRINT INT 3.8 ; print 3 (integer part of 3.8)
PRINT INT RANDOM 100 ; random integer number (0 <= x < 100)
PRINT INT “7” ; convert the string parameter to integer
 +FLOAT + ; convert the string parameter to float number
PRINT 2 * FLOAT “5.5” ; print 11.0
 +STR + ; convert the number parameter to string
PRINT “Result: ” + STR 5 ; print “Result: 5”
PRINT 10 * STR 5 ; print 5555555555
 +SQRT + PRINT SQRT 100 ; print 10, square root of 100
 +SIN + PRINT SIN 90 * PI/180 ; print 1.0 (sinus of 90° in radians)
 +COS + PRINT COS 0 * PI/180 ; print 1.0 (cosinus of 0° in radians)
 +LOG10 + PRINT LOG10 100 ; print 2.0 (common logarithm of 100)
 +ROUND + PRINT ROUND 3.8 ; print 4 (rounding 3.8)
PRINT ROUND RANDOM 100 ; random integer number (0 <= x <= 100)
 +ABS + PRINT ABS -10 ; print 10, absolute value of -10
 +COUNT + PRINT COUNT “text” ; print 4, character count of “text”
PRINT COUNT [1, 2, 3] ; print 3, size of the list
 +SET + ; Convert list to Python set
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] ; print {4, 5, 6}
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] | SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {1, 4, 5, 6, 9}, union
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] & SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {4}, intersection
PRINT SET ([4, 5, 6, 6]) - SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {5, 6}, difference
PRINT SET [4, 5, 6, 6] ^ SET [4, 1, 9] ; print {1, 5, 6, 9}, symmetric difference
+RANGE + ; Python-like list generation
PRINT LIST RANGE 10 ; print [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]
PRINT LIST RANGE 3 10 ; print [3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]
PRINT LIST RANGE 3 10 3 ; print [3, 6, 9]

FOR i IN RANGE 10 50 10 [ ; loop for [10, 20, 30, 40]
FORWARD i
LEFT 90
]
 +LIST + ; remove the repeating elements of a list using set and list conversion
PRINT LIST (SET [1, 3, 5, 5, 2, 1]) ; print [1, 3, 5, 2]
 +TUPLE +Conversion to Python tuple (non-modifiable list) + PRINT TUPLE [4, 5]
 +SORTED +It returns with a sorted list. + PRINT SORTED [5, 1, 3, 4] ; print [1, 3, 4, 5]
 +SUB +Substitute character sequences using regex (regular expression) patterns. + PRINT SUB (“t”, “T”, “text”) ; print “Text”, replacing “t” with “T”
PRINT SUB (“(.)”, “\\1\\1”, “text”) ; print “tteexxtt”, doubling every characters
 +SEARCH +Search character sequences patterns using regex patterns. + IF SEARCH (“\w”, "word") [ PRINT “Letter in the word.” ]
 +FINDALL +Find all character sequences in the input string matching the given regex pattern. + PRINT FINDALL(“\w+”, “Dogs, cats.”) ; print [“Dogs”, “cats”], the list of the words.
 +MIN + PRINT MIN [1, 2, 3] ; print 1, the lowest element of the list
 +MAX + PRINT MAX [1, 2, 3] ; print 3, the greatest element of the list
 +Color constants + PENCOLOR “SILVER” ; set by name
PENCOLOR [1] ; set by identifiers
PENCOLOR “~SILVER” ; random silver color

 + +Identifier +Name + +0 +BLACK + +1 +SILVER + +2 +GRAY/GREY + +3 +WHITE + +4 +MAROON + +5 +RED + +6 +PURPLE + +7 +FUCHSIA/MAGENTA + +8 +GREEN + +9 +LIME + +10 +OLIVE + +11 +YELLOW + +12 +NAVY + +13 +BLUE + +14 +TEAL + +15 +AQUA + +16 +PINK + +17 +TOMATO + +18 +ORANGE + +19 +GOLD + +20 +VIOLET + +21 +SKYBLUE + +22 +CHOCOLATE + +23 +BROWN + +24 +INVISIBLE +
+ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a140c180 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Mail Merge Toolbar + /text/swriter/mailmergetoolbar.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +Mail Merge Toolbar +The Mail Merge Toolbar contains commands for the final steps of the mail merge process. +
+ +
+Go to menu View - Toolbars and select Mail Merge +
+ + + + +(Recipient number) +Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient. + + + + + +Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records. + + +Exclude recipient +Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge. + + +Edit Individual Documents +Creates a single merged document with page breaks between each recipient. The names and the addresses of the recipients are contained in the document, which can be customized as needed. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..405fe1b47 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Writer Help +/text/swriter/main0000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Writer Help + +Working With %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + + +Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + + + +
+Help about the Help + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..877821025 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Menus +/text/swriter/main0100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c0141c4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + File + /text/swriter/main0101.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

File

+ These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46b53eac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Edit + /text/swriter/main0102.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Edit

+This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +

Select Text

+ + + + + +

Go to Page

+Opens a dialog box to enter which page number should be shown. (CommandCtrl+G) + + +

Comment

+ Shows submenu that gives options to reply, resolve and delete comments.When a submenu for Comment is made, then replace label and description with an embed - 19.10.20 + + +

Fields

+ + +

Links to External Files

+ + +

Object

+ + +

Direct Cursor Mode

+Allows a user to click at the beginning, middle, or end of any possible text line on a page and then begin typing. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc44b893 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + View + /text/swriter/main0103.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

View

+This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. +
+ +

Normal

+ + +

Web

+ + + + + + + +

Scrollbars

+Show or hide the horizontal and vertical scroll bars that are used to change the viewable area of a document that doesn't fit within the window. + + + + + +

Table Boundaries

+Shows or hides the borders of table cells that have no set borders. The boundaries are only visible on screen and are not printed. + +

Images and Charts

+Show or hide graphical objects like images and charts within a document. + + + + +

Comments

+Show or hide a document's comments and replies to them. + +

Resolved comments

+Show or hide resolved comments. + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Zoom

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5fee8f302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + Insert + /text/swriter/main0104.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Insert

+The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes images, media, charts, objects from other applications, hyperlink, comments, symbols, footnotes, and sections. +
+

Page Break

+Inserts a manual page break at the current cursor position and places the cursor at the beginning of the next page. + +

Image

+ + + + + +

Section

+ +

Text from File

+ +

Textbox

+ + + + + + +

Bookmark

+ + + + +

Horizontal Line

+Inserts a horizontal line at the current cursor position. + + + + + +

Envelope

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef80781df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Format + /text/swriter/main0105.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Format

+Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. +
+ + +
+

Align Text

+Opens a submenu where you can align text and objects.shared/01/05080000.xhp is the start for a submenu, but it needs to be elaborated and probably needs appl-switches for other modules. Heading and description here can be replaced with an embed to that submenu file. Can also embed submenu in simpress/main_format.xhp, then the section id here can be removed. +
+ + +

Character

+ +

Paragraph

+ +
+

Lists

+Opens a submenu where you can modify the formatting of list paragraphs.When a submenu is made for Lists, then the heading and text can be replaced with an embed to that file. Can also be embedded in simpress/main_format.xhp, and then section id can be removed. +
+

Bullets and Numbering

+ + +

Title Page

+Opens a dialog where you can design a title page.When a help page is made for Title Page, then the heading and text can be replaced with the embed. +

Comments

+When comments are present, the character dialog is presented. Changes to font and font formatting are applied to all comments. + +

Columns

+ +

Watermark

+ +

Sections

+ +

Image

+ +Text Box and Shape +

Frame and Object

+Opens a submenu to link and unlink frames, and edit properties of a selected frame.When a submenu is made for Frame and Object, then the heading and text can be replaced with the embed. + + + + + +

Rotate or Flip

+Opens a submenu where you can rotate or and flip a selected shape or image. Text boxes can only be rotated.When a submenu is made for Rotate or Flip, then the heading and text can be replaced with the embed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bd635d8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Tools + /text/swriter/main0106.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Tools

+ Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences. +
+ + +

Automatic Spell Checking

+ + + + + + + + +

ImageMap

+ + +

Redact

+ + +

Auto-Redact

+ + +

Chapter Numbering

+ + +

Line Numbering

+ + +

Footnotes and Endnotes

+ + + + + + +

Address Book Source

+ + + + + +

Sort

+ + + + +

Customize

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a058f883d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0107.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Window +/text/swriter/main0107.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Window + Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows. +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e75ca333 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + + + Table + /text/swriter/main0110.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Table

+Shows commands to insert, edit, and delete a table and its elements inside a text document. +
+ +

Insert Table

+Inserts a new table. + +

Insert

+Opens a submenu with the following command options: +

Rows Above

+Insert a row above the row where the cursor is currently placed. +

Rows Below

+Insert a row below the row where the cursor is currently placed. +

Rows

+Opens dialog box for inserting rows.see also swriter/02/0409 +

Columns Before

+Inserts a column before the column where the cursor is currently placed. +

Columns After

+Inserts a column after the column where the cursor is currently placed. +

Columns

+Opens dialog box for inserting columns.see also swriter/02/0410 + +

Delete

+ + +

Rows

+Deletes the selected rows. + +

Columns

+Deletes the selected columns. + + +

Table

+Deletes the current table. + +

Select

+ + + + +

Cell

+Selects the current cell. + +

Row

+Selects the current row. + +

Column

+Selects the current column. + +

Table

+Selects the current table. + +

Size

+ + +

Row Height

+Opens the Row Height dialog where you can change the height of a row. + +

Minimize Row Height

+Set the row height to the smallest possible for the content in each selected row. + +

Optimal Row Height

+ + +

Distribute Rows Evenly

+ + +

Column Width

+Opens the Column Width dialog where you can change the width of a column. + +

Minimize Column Width

+Set column width to the smallest possible for the content in each selected column. + +

Optimal Column Width

+ + +

Distribute Columns Evenly

+ + +

Merge Cells

+ + +

Split Cells

+ + + + +

Protect Cells

+ + +

Unprotect Cells

+ + +

AutoFormat Styles

+ + +

Number Format

+Opens a dialog where you can specify the format of numbers in the table. + + +

Number Recognition

+Toggles the setting for automatically recognizing numbers or dates that you enter into a table cell, converting them from text to an appropriate number format. + +

Header Rows Repeat Across Pages

+Repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. + +

Rows to Break Across Pages

+Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. + +

Convert

+ + + +

Text to Table

+Opens a dialog where you can convert the selected text to a table. Opens a dialog where you can convert the selected text to a table. + + +

Table to Text

+Opens a dialog where you can convert the current table to text. Opens a dialog where you can convert the current table to text. + +

Text Formula

+Opens the Formula bar to enter or edit a formula. + +

Sort

+UFI: removed help ids + +

Properties

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a26fb7871 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0115.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Styles (menu) + /text/swriter/main0115.xhp + + + +
+ +

Styles

+ Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a text document. +
+

Text styles entries

+ The entries includes most common paragraph, character and list styles. Click on the style to apply. + You can customize the list of styles entries using menu Tools - Customize. Because custom styles belongs to the actual document, remember to store the customized menu in the document scope. +

Edit Style

+ Opens the Paragraph Style dialog box of the current paragraph. +

Update Selected Style

+ Update the paragraph style with the direct formatting applied to the current paragraph. +

New Style from Selection

+ Adds a paragraph style with the settings of the current selection. You will be prompted to enter the style name. +

Load Styles from Template

+ Import styles from another document or template into the current document. +

Manage Styles

+ Opens the Styles deck in the sidebar. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..61582ff91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Form Menu + /text/swriter/main0120.xhp + + + +
+ +

Form

+ Contains commands for activate form design mode, open control wizards and insert form controls in your document. +
+
+

Design Mode

+ Enable or disable form design mode. +
+
+

Control Wizards

+ Enable or disable control wizards. +
+ + + + + + + + + +

More fields

+Date, time, numerical, currency and pattern form fields. + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Automatic Control Focus

+ Enable or disable Automatic Control Focus +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d895fac1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/swriter/main0200.xhp + + + +
+

Toolbars +

+This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in $[officename] Writer. + +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec3c296d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Bar + /text/swriter/main0202.xhp + + + +
+

Formatting Bar

+ The Formatting bar contains several text formatting functions. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Font Color

+ + + + + + +

Additional icons

+

Increase Font

+
+ + Increases the font size of the selected text. +
+

Reduce Font

+
+ + Reduces the font size of the selected text. +
+ If CTL support is enabled, two additional icons are visible. + +

Left-To-Right

+ + + + +left to right icon + + + + The text is entered from left to right. + + +
+ + +

Right-To-Left

+ + + + +right to left icon + + + + The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5180db61c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + +Image Bar +/text/swriter/main0203.xhp + + + +
+ +Image Bar +The Image Bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected bitmap graphics. +
+Flip Vertically +Flip Horizontally +Graphics Properties + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdd3894bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Table Bar +/text/swriter/main0204.xhp + + + +
+ +

Table Bar

+The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table. +
+ + + + +Delete Row + + +Delete Column + + +following only optional, ext.help is available: Select Table Select Column Select Row +

Merge Cells

+ + + + + + + + + + +AutoFormat + + + + + + + +

Sort

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97db0006a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0205.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Object Properties Bar +/text/swriter/main0205.xhp + + + +
+ +Drawing Object Properties Bar +You can see the Drawing Object Properties bar in Writer and Calc. Select the menu View - Toolbars - Drawing Object Properties. The controls are enabled when a drawing object is selected. You see some different icons by default, whether the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet. +
+ + + + + +Line Style + + +Line Width + + +Line Color + + + + +Area Style/Filling + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d32fdb294 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Bullets and Numbering Bar +/text/swriter/main0206.xhp + + + +
+ +

Bullets and Numbering Bar

+The Bullets and Numbering bar contains functions to modify the structure of list paragraphs, including changing their order and list level. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..018d4d4d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + Status Bar (Writer) + /text/swriter/main0208.xhp + + + + + +
+

Status Bar

+The Status Bar contains information about the current document and offers various buttons with special functions. +
+ + + + + +

Language

i80434 +Displays the language for the selected text. Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the current paragraph. + + + Choose None to exclude the text from spellchecking and hyphenation. + + + Choose Reset to Default Language to re-apply the default language for the selection or the paragraph. + + + Choose More to open the character formatting dialog with more options. + + + + + + + +

Digital Signature

+Click to start digital signature process. You must have a digital certificate to complete the process. See also Digital Signatures. + + +

Zoom & View Layout

+Three controls on the Writer Status Bar allow you to change the zoom and view layout of your text documents. + +The View Layout icons show from left to right: Single column mode. View mode with pages side by side. Book mode with two pages as in an open book. + +Drag the Zoom slider to the left to show more pages, drag to the right to zoom into a page and show a smaller area of the page. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d47a09fd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Print Preview Bar (Writer) +/text/swriter/main0210.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Jump to Specific Page

+ To go to a specific page in the Print Preview, type the page number in the entry box, then press Enter. + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print

+Open the Print dialog. + +
+

Close Preview

+Exit from Print Preview. + + + + +Close Preview Icon + + + + Close Preview + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c59b373e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Rulers +/text/swriter/main0213.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Rulers + Rulers display the dimensions of the page, and the position of tabs, indents, borders and columns. You can modify all of these on the rulers using the mouse. +
+ By double-clicking on the ruler, you can open the Paragraph dialog and assign direct paragraph formatting for the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc6dd6736 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formula Bar +/text/swriter/main0214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Formula Bar + +The Formula Bar allows you to create and insert calculations into a text document. To activate the Formula Bar, press F2. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..349205342 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0215.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Frame Bar + /text/swriter/main0215.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Frame Bar

+ When a frame is selected, the Frame Bar provides the most important functions for formatting and positioning the frame. +
+ + +

Wrap Off

+ + You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page. + +

Wrap On

+ + This icon represents the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page. + +

Wrap Through

+ + You can also define this setting on the Wrap tab page. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Background Color

+ + +

Frame Properties

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..159323924 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0216.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +OLE Object Bar +/text/swriter/main0216.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +OLE Object Bar +The OLE Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formatting and positioning objects. +
+ + +No Wrap + + You can also choose this setting on the Wrap tab page. + +Wrap + + This icon corresponds to the Page Wrap option on the Wrap tab page. + +Wrap Through + + You can also achieve the same effect through the Wrap tab page. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Object Properties + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01436cc62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0220.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text Object Bar +/text/swriter/main0220.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Text Object Bar +Contains formatting commands for text that is contained in a draw object. The Text Object bar appears when you double-click inside a draw object. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +Superscript + + +Subscript + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Select All + + +Character + + +Paragraph +Here you can define the indents, spacing, alignment and line spacing for the paragraph currently selected. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ea4fc0a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] Writer Features +/text/swriter/main0503.xhp + + + +
+$[officename] Writer Features + +$[officename] Writer lets you design and produce text documents that can include graphics, tables, or charts. You can then save the documents in a variety of formats, including the standardized OpenDocument format (ODF), Microsoft Word .doc format, or HTML. And you can easily export your document to the Portable Document Format (PDF). +
+Writing +$[officename] Writer lets you create both basic documents, such as memos, faxes, letters , resumes and merge documents, as well as long and complex or multi-part documents, complete with bibliographies, reference tables and indexes. +$[officename] Writer also includes such useful features as a spellchecker, a thesaurus, AutoCorrect, and hyphenation as well as a variety of templates for almost every purpose. You can also create your own templates using the wizards. +Designing and Structuring +$[officename] offers a wide variety of options to design documents. Use the Styles window to create, assign and modify styles for paragraphs, individual characters, frames and pages. In addition, the Navigator helps you to quickly move around inside your documents, lets you look at your document in an outline view, and keeps track of the objects that you have inserted into your document. +You can also create various indexes and tables in text documents. You can define the structure and appearance of the indexes and tables according to your individual needs. Live hyperlinks and bookmarks let you jump directly to the corresponding items in the text. +Desktop Publishing with $[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer contains numerous desktop publishing and drawing tools to assist you in creating professionally styled documents, such as brochures, newsletters and invitations. You can format your documents with multi-column layouts, frames, graphics, tables, and other objects. +Calculations +Text documents in $[officename] have an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculations or logical links. You can easily create a table in a text document in order to perform calculations. +Creating Drawings +The $[officename] Writer drawing tool lets you create drawings, graphics, legends, and other types of drawings directly in text documents. +Inserting Graphics +You can insert pictures with different formats into a text document, including graphics with a JPG or GIF format. In addition, the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics, and the Fontwork Gallery creates stunning font effects. +Flexible Application Interface +The program interface is designed so that you can configure it according to your preferences, including customizing icons and menus. You can position various program windows, such as the Styles window or the Navigator as floating windows anywhere on the screen. You can also dock some windows to the edge of the workspace. +Drag&Drop +The drag-and-drop feature enables you to work quickly and efficiently with text documents in $[officename]. For example, you can drag-and-drop objects, such as graphics from the Gallery, from one location to another in the same document, or between open $[officename] documents. +Help Functions +You can use the Help system as a complete reference for $[officename] applications, including instructions for simple and complex tasks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d63ccf819 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Footnote and Endnote + /text/swriter/menu/insert_footnote_endnote.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Footnote and Endnote +The menu contains commands to insert a footnote or endnote with or without additional user interaction. +
+ +Footnote +Insert a footnote at the current cursor position without a prompt. + +Endnote +Insert a endnote at the current cursor position without a prompt. + +Footnote or Endnote + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68e857636 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Frame + /text/swriter/menu/insert_frame.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Frame +This submenu contains both interactive and non-interactive means of inserting a frame. +
+ +Frame Interactively +Insert a frame by drawing its shape with the mouse cursor. + + +Floating Frame + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a0772f5d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Header and Footer + /text/swriter/menu/insert_header_footer.xhp + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0260ab332 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + More Breaks (submenu) + /text/swriter/menu/submenu_more_breaks.xhp + + + +
+ +
+
+

+More Breaks

+Submenu with additional row, column, and page breaks +
+

Insert Manual Row Break

+Manual Row Break Icon + + +text documents; inserting column breaks +column breaks; inserting +inserting; manual column breaks +manual column breaks + +

Insert Manual Column Break

+Manual Column Break Icon + +

Manual Break

+Manual Break icon + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eff70974a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ + + + + + + + Track Changes Toolbar + /text/swriter/track_changes_toolbar.xhp + + + +
+ +

Track Changes Toolbar

+ Contains the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file. +
+
+ Choose View - Toolbars - Track Changes. +
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Show track changes + + + + Show track changes + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Record Changes + + + + Record Changes + + +
+
+ +

Previous Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Previous track change + + + + Previous track change + + +
+ +

Next Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Next track change + + + + Next track change + + +
+ +

Accept Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Accept Track Change + + + + Accept Track Change + + +
+ +

Reject Track Change

+ + + + + Icon Reject Track Change + + + + Reject Track Change + + +
+ +

Accept All Tracked Changes

+ + + + + Icon Accept All Tracked Changes + + + + Accept All Tracked Changes + + +
+ +

Reject All Tracked Changes

+ + + + + Icon Reject All Tracked Changes + + + + Reject All Tracked Changes + + +
+ +

Accept Track Change and select next one

+ + + + + Icon Accept Track Change and select next one + + + + Accept Track Change and select next one + + +
+ +

Reject Track Change and select next one

+ + + + + Icon Reject Track Change and select next one + + + + Reject Track Change and select next one + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + Icon Manage Track Changes + + + + Manage Track Changes + + +
+
+ + + + + + + Icon Insert Comment + + + + Insert Comment + + +
+ + + + + + + Icon Insert Track Change Comment + + + + Insert Track Change Comment + + +
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Protect Changes + + + + Protect Changes + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + Icon Compare Document + + + + Compare Document + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + + + + Icon Merge Document + + + + Merge Document + + +
+
+ + + -- cgit v1.2.3